Está en la página 1de 336

UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE CHIMBORAZO UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE CHIMBORAZO UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE CHIMBORAZO UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE CHIMBORAZO

FACULTAD DE INGENIERA FACULTAD DE INGENIERA FACULTAD DE INGENIERA FACULTAD DE INGENIERA


ESCUELA DE INGENIERA ELECTRNICA Y TELECOMUNICACIONES ESCUELA DE INGENIERA ELECTRNICA Y TELECOMUNICACIONES ESCUELA DE INGENIERA ELECTRNICA Y TELECOMUNICACIONES ESCUELA DE INGENIERA ELECTRNICA Y TELECOMUNICACIONES

CTEDRA CTEDRA CTEDRA CTEDRA: : : :
OPTATIVA TELEVISIN DIGITAL

TEMA: TEMA: TEMA: TEMA:
MEDICION DE SEALES DE TELEVISIN UTILIZANDO EQUIPOS DE LABORATORIO
PARA SU ANLISIS DE ACUERDO AL ESTNDAR FCC.
Integrantes Integrantes Integrantes Integrantes: : : :
Fredy Armijos
Dario Astudillo
Mayra Cujano
Christian Pizann
Cristhian Yagos


Docente: Docente: Docente: Docente: ING. ANBAL LLANGA
Nivel: Nivel: Nivel: Nivel: QUINTO AO

Riobamba, 23 Riobamba, 23 Riobamba, 23 Riobamba, 23 de Septiembre de 2013 de Septiembre de 2013 de Septiembre de 2013 de Septiembre de 2013
INTRODUCCIN INTRODUCCIN INTRODUCCIN INTRODUCCIN
Televisin significa ver a distancia. De una manera prctica, el sistema de TV permite
convertir la informacin de una escena determinada a una seal elctrica de video y de audio
para ser transmitida al receptor (televisor), mediante una comunicacin tipo simplex. Luego
esta informacin es re ensamblada en el receptor para reproducir la escena filmada. En caso
de TV monocromtica la imagen se reproduce en blanco y negro con una escala de grises
intermedia que represente los diversos tonos de luz de la imagen original. En caso de TV a
color la imagen se reproduce casi fielmente en sus colores originales como combinacin de los
colores primarios aditivos: rojo, verde y azul, (RGB).
La televisin como medio de comunicacin se ha convertido en la principal va para transmitir
ideas, entretener y hacer comercio (publicidad). Combina audio y video, por lo que involucra
en mayor grado al usuario. Adems, su enorme popularidad se debe a que el servicio es
completamente gratis. Slo se requiere del aparato receptor y se puede as sintonizar
cualquier seal libre (no codificada) que pueda ser captada. Tal es su grado de penetracin
que casi puede decirse que no hay un hogar sin televisin.
Los principios que rigen la televisin involucran una gran parte de los conceptos de la
ingeniera electrnica. Desde los fundamentos de las comunicaciones hasta los circuitos que la
hacen posible. Este trabajo sin embargo est enfocado desde el punto de vista de la
radiodifusin, considerando la prestacin del servicio y las normas que lo rigen. Todo
pretendiendo ser muy conciso tocando puntos especficos que permitan saber de qu se trata
el sistema con el cuidado de incluir la informacin ms til posible. [1]












OBJETIVO GENERAL OBJETIVO GENERAL OBJETIVO GENERAL OBJETIVO GENERAL
Describir y manipular los instrumentos de medicin que posee el laboratorio de
electrnica y telecomunicaciones, realizando las distintas mediciones para seales de
televisin.
OBJETIVOS ESPECFICOS OBJETIVOS ESPECFICOS OBJETIVOS ESPECFICOS OBJETIVOS ESPECFICOS
Instrumentacin para seales de televisin.
Anlisis de mediciones de acuerdo al estndar FCC.
Comparar a los tres instrumentos de mediciones laboratorio.

MARCO TERICO MARCO TERICO MARCO TERICO MARCO TERICO
Frecuencias y bandas de operacin. Canales. Ancho de banda Frecuencias y bandas de operacin. Canales. Ancho de banda Frecuencias y bandas de operacin. Canales. Ancho de banda Frecuencias y bandas de operacin. Canales. Ancho de banda
Para la transmisin de la seal de televisin, a las estaciones les es asignado un grupo de
frecuencias llamado canal. Los canales son representados mediante una numeracin (que es
el nmero que comnmente asociamos a la estacin de televisin canal 4) que indica las
frecuencias asignadas del espectro radioelctrico. Cada canal de TV tiene un ancho de banda
de 6 MHz (independientemente de su ubicacin) y estn distribuidos de la siguiente manera:
De 54 MHz a 88 MHz los canales 2 al 6 de la banda baja de VHF
De 174 MHz a 216 MHz los canales 7 al 13 de la banda superior de VHF
De 470 MHz a 890 MHz los canales 14 al 83 de la banda UHF
Como puede notarse el espectro dedicado a TV es bastante amplio y abarca prcticamente una
dcada. En la figura se muestra la caracterstica de amplitud de un canal de TV genrico.

Figura 1: Figura 1: Figura 1: Figura 1: Caracterstica de amplitud para transmisin de imgenes de televisin. La intensidad del campo en los puntos A no debe
exceder los 20 dB por debajo de la portadora de video (picture carrier). El grfico no est a escala.
Un mismo canal puede ser utilizado por varias estaciones, las cuales deben tener la separacin
suficiente (en distancia) para minimizar la posibilidad de interferencia cocanal. Dichas
estaciones (estaciones cocanal) deben estar separadas de 270 km a 350 km para canales VHF
y de 250 km a 330 km para canales UHF. Sin embargo, canales consecutivos pero no
adyacentes en frecuencia (como los canales 4 y 5, 6 y 7 13 y 14) pueden ser asignados en la
misma rea. [1]
Esquemas de modulacin Esquemas de modulacin Esquemas de modulacin Esquemas de modulacin
La modulacin de la seal de TV usa esquemas diferentes para el video y el audio. La seal de
video es modulada en amplitud debido a que mantiene los costos de los receptores bajos (por
su sencillez). Considerando que la seal de video tiene un ancho de banda grande (en
comparacin con otros servicios de radiodifusin como radio AM y FM) en principio se pens
en el esquema SSB. Sin embargo, ste tiene un desempeo pobre en bajas frecuencias, lo cual
es inconveniente porque la seal de video posee un alto contenido de informacin en
frecuencias bajas. Si en cambio se utilizase DSB que no presenta ese inconveniente, el ancho
de banda resultante es demasiado elevado. De manera que el esquema que mejor se ajusta a
estos requerimientos es VSB + portadora.
Los 6 MHz de la seal de TV son distribuidos de la siguiente manera. La banda lateral superior
de la seal de video es transmitida sin atenuacin hasta 4 MHz. Despus es atenuada de
manera que no interfiera con la banda inferior de la seal de sonido, cuya portadora se
encuentra a 4,5 MHz de la portadora de imagen. La banda inferior de la seal de imagen
(vestigio) es transmitida sin atenuacin en el rango de 0 a 0,75 MHz y es atenuada
completamente a los 1,25 MHz. Es importante sealar que esta seal no presenta la forma
exacta de la modulacin VSB. La forma precisa VSB de la seal toma lugar en el receptor antes
de la modulacin. La figura VSB se logra ms fcilmente en el amplificador IF (frecuencia
intermedia) que en el receptor donde el nivel de potencia es bajo. La transmisin VSB
utilizada en televisin es designada por la FCC (Federal Communications Commission) FCC (Federal Communications Commission) FCC (Federal Communications Commission) FCC (Federal Communications Commission) como
emisin tipo ASC.
Por otra parte, la seal de sonido es modulada en frecuencia en otra portadora con una
excursin de frecuencia de f = 25 kHz. Con un ancho de banda de 10 kHz, se tiene una tasa de
desviacin (razn de excursin de frecuencia para la modulacin y el ancho de banda de la
seal en banda base) de 2,5 y un ancho de banda de FM de aproximadamente 70 kHz. De esta
manera se tiene que el ancho de banda total de la seal de TV modulada es de alrededor de
5,75 MHz dejando una banda de guarda de 250 kHz entre canales adyacentes. [1]




PROCEDIMIENTOS PROCEDIMIENTOS PROCEDIMIENTOS PROCEDIMIENTOS
Lo fundamental para empezar a realizar las manipulacin y por lo tanto las mediciones de los
distintos instrumentos de medicin, es recomendable tener muy claro como se determina las
frecuencias de portadora de video, color o croma y la de audio.
Como se puede mostrar el canal de estudio corresponde al canal 2, es el que describe a
continuacin:
El canal 2 (54 MHz 60 MHz) est en el rango de frecuencias VHF en la Banda I. [2]

Frecuencia Frecuencia Frecuencia Frecuencia
Inicial: Inicial: Inicial: Inicial: 54 MHz
Final: Final: Final: Final: 60 MHz
Central: Central: Central: Central: 57Mhz
Ancho de Banda: Ancho de Banda: Ancho de Banda: Ancho de Banda: 6 MHz

Portadora de V Portadora de V Portadora de V Portadora de Video ideo ideo ideo

Frecuencia de la portadora de video Frecuencia de la portadora de video Frecuencia de la portadora de video Frecuencia de la portadora de video
Frecuencia inicial + 1.25 MHz
Frecuencia de la portadora de video = 54
MHz + 1.25MHz = 55.25MHz

Portadora de C Portadora de C Portadora de C Portadora de Color olor olor olor

Frecuencia de la portadora de color Frecuencia de la portadora de color Frecuencia de la portadora de color Frecuencia de la portadora de color
Frecuencia de la portadora de video + 3.58
MHz
Frecuencia de la portadora de color=
55.25 MHz + 3.58 MHz = 58.83 MHz


Portadora de A Portadora de A Portadora de A Portadora de Audio udio udio udio

Frecuencia de la portadora de audio Frecuencia de la portadora de audio Frecuencia de la portadora de audio Frecuencia de la portadora de audio
Frecuencia final 0.25Mhz
Frecuencia de la portadora de sonido = 60
MHz 0.25MHz = 59.75 MHz

MANIPULACIN INSTRUMENTOS DE MANIPULACIN INSTRUMENTOS DE MANIPULACIN INSTRUMENTOS DE MANIPULACIN INSTRUMENTOS DE MEDICIN MEDICIN MEDICIN MEDICIN
Analizador de Espectros N1 Analizador de Espectros N1 Analizador de Espectros N1 Analizador de Espectros N1
Como se explico anteriormente en el analizador de espectros se debe fijar las frecuencias
iniciales y la final, en cuento a la central no hay que fijarla ya que esta se fija automticamente,
para esto se debe presionar estos botones.
En el bloque Main Main Main Main presionamos F FF Fre re re req qq quency uency uency uency a continuacin se muestra en pantalla las
siguientes opciones center, center, center, center, start, stop start, stop start, stop start, stop y step step step step en estas opciones debemos poner la frecuencia
requeridas.

Dichas frecuencias se deben poner de acuerdo al rango de frecuencias de canal de estudio en
este caso es el dos y las frecuencias son las nombradas anteriormente.
Una vez configurado las frecuencias se debe observar un grfico como este.

Figura Figura Figura Figura 2 22 2: : : : Seales de portadoras de televisin
En el grfico se pueden observar las tres portadoras (video, croma y audio), estas imagen fue
tomada en el analizador de espectros fsico.
Como pueden observar en el grafico se observan puntos en este caso 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 y 3 33 3, , , , estos se pueden
marcar de la siguiente manera.
En el bloque Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement presionamos el botn M MM Marker arker arker arker seleccionamos la opcin Marker Marker Marker Marker 1 11 1 2 22 2 3 33 3
4 44 4 a continuacin seleccionamos el marcador por el numero y le activamos en la opcin ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
poniendo ON ON ON ON nosotros solo podemos poner cuatro marcadores en este caso necesitamos tres
por lo que est perfecto, al activar el marcador nosotros debemos poner en que frecuencia
debemos poner el marcador en nuestro caso se pone: 1 11 1 en la portadora de video (55,25 MHz),
2 22 2 en la portadora de color o de croma (58,83MHz) y 3 33 3 en la portadora de audio (59,75MHz).
IMPORTANTE: IMPORTANTE: IMPORTANTE: IMPORTANTE:
En el caso de que la imagen no se pueda distinguir muy bien las portadoras tenemos la opcin
en el bloque Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement el botn Trace Trace Trace Trace luego la opcin Trace Trace Trace Trace A AA A B C B C B C B C presionamos la opcin
AVG ON OFF AVG ON OFF AVG ON OFF AVG ON OFF seleccionamos ON ON ON ON y listo la imagen se nos pone ms definida ya que esta opcin
lo que hace en un promedio de los espectros.
Software Eagleshot_V3.5.2_NB_DI Software Eagleshot_V3.5.2_NB_DI Software Eagleshot_V3.5.2_NB_DI Software Eagleshot_V3.5.2_NB_DI
Este software nos facilita ver en tiempo real lo que se ve en el analizador de espectros fsico,
es un analizador de espectros mediante software y nos facilita la manipulacin ya que nos
brinda con mayor facilidad el anlisis de los datos obtenidos.
A continuacin se muestra la interface del programa simulador del analizador de espectros:
Esta opcion nos permite realizar las configuraciones iniciales como por ejemplo el puerto
de conexin, los tipos de formato en los que podemos guardar las capturas y la ubicacin de
guardado.

Esta opcin nos permite iniciar la comunicacin.
Esta opcin nos permite abrir archivos antes creados.
Esta opcin nos permite salir del programa.
Esta opcin nos permite grabar una secuencia de imgenes.
Esta opcin nos permite capturar una imagen.
Esta opcin nos permite guardar en la PC en los formatos JPG, BMP y formato texto.
Esta opcin imprimir en formato (JPG / BMP / TXT).
Esta opcin nos permite marcar puntos (amplitud), Teniendo que activar el marcador y
especificar la frecuencia y el nmero que se asigna.

Esta opcin nos permite borrar la pantalla.
Esta opcin nos permite el control como frecuencia (start, stop, center y span), amplitud
(nivel de referencia, unidades y escalas).

Mediciones Analizador de Espectros N1 Mediciones Analizador de Espectros N1 Mediciones Analizador de Espectros N1 Mediciones Analizador de Espectros N1
Se realizo la configuracin inicial especificando la frecuencia inicial, central, final y span.
Como podemos observar el span corresponde al ancho de banda de un canal de televisin
segn FCC este debe ser de 6 MHz.

Figura 3: Figura 3: Figura 3: Figura 3: Captura de portadoras sin marcador
A continuacin se fue colocado los marcadores de cada una de las portadoras tanto la de
video, croma y la de audio. De la siguiente manera.
Portadora Portadora Portadora Portadora Indicador Indicador Indicador Indicador
Video 0
Croma o color 2
Audio 1
Tabla 1: Tabla 1: Tabla 1: Tabla 1:Indicadores Portadoras

Figura 4 Figura 4 Figura 4 Figura 4: : : : Captura de portadoras con marcador
Los resultados obtenidos fueron los siguientes:
Nmero de Nmero de Nmero de Nmero de
Marcador Marcador Marcador Marcador
Frecuencia Frecuencia Frecuencia Frecuencia
(MHz) (MHz) (MHz) (MHz)
Nivel (dBm) Nivel (dBm) Nivel (dBm) Nivel (dBm)
0 55.25 -67,8
2 58,83 -85,8
1 59,75 -69,2
Tabla Tabla Tabla Tabla 2 22 2: :: : Nivel de Portadoras Analizador de Espectros N1
Analizador de Espectros N2 Analizador de Espectros N2 Analizador de Espectros N2 Analizador de Espectros N2
Como se puede observar en las siguientes imgenes, se diferencia por las frecuencias de las
tres portadoras la de video, color y de audio. Se puede observar el nivel de voltaje y de
potencia de las portadoras de televisin.

Figura Figura Figura Figura 5 55 5: :: : Seal de portadora de video

Figura Figura Figura Figura 6 66 6: : : : Seal de portadora de croma o color

Figura Figura Figura Figura 7 77 7: : : : Seal de portador de audio
En este instrumento de medicin nos permite no solo ver la portadora de audio sino que
tambin nos permite escuchar el audio del canal en estudio.
Para esto debemos configurar el equipo de la siguiente manera:
Debemos pulsar el botn Clr Clr Clr Clr borrar la frecuencia, luego ponemos la frecuencia que
necesitamos en este caso la frecuencia de portadora de audio (59,75MHz) separar por puntos
las decimas. Y luego ponemos E EE Enter nter nter nter y se escribe la nueva frecuencia en la parte superior,
recordar que esta frecuencia es la central, podemos editar lo pasos de frecuencia y el span.
TOMAR EN CUENTA TOMAR EN CUENTA TOMAR EN CUENTA TOMAR EN CUENTA: :: :
A veces se puede cometer un error con respecto al conectar la antena, el conector est ubicado
a la parte izquierda del analizador. Se suele cometer este error ya que muchas veces no nos
facilitan el adaptador del conector por lo que se suele conectar donde no se debe en el
conector de la derecha, ya que en este se conecta con facilidad la antena, por lo que el audio es
nulo.

Figura 8: Figura 8: Figura 8: Figura 8: Ubicacin correcta antena
IMPORTANTE: IMPORTANTE: IMPORTANTE: IMPORTANTE:
Recordemos que el audio en televisin esta modulado en FM por lo que se debe configurar el
equipo para que desmodule el audio en FM.
Se configura de la siguiente manera.
En el botn Mode Mode Mode Mode, lo presionamos y nos muestra 4 opciones W WW W- -- -FM, N FM, N FM, N FM, N- -- -FM, AM FM, AM FM, AM FM, AM, y SSB SSB SSB SSB, de estas
opciones seleccionamos la N NN N- -- -FM FM FM FM, , , , una vez realizado eso podremos escuchar con ms claridad y
nitidez el audio procedente del canal 2.
Mediciones Mediciones Mediciones Mediciones Analizador de Analizador de Analizador de Analizador de Espectros N2 Espectros N2 Espectros N2 Espectros N2
Portadora Portadora Portadora Portadora Frecuencia(MHz) Frecuencia(MHz) Frecuencia(MHz) Frecuencia(MHz) Nivel (dBmV) Nivel (dBmV) Nivel (dBmV) Nivel (dBmV)
Video 55,25 -28,2
Croma o color 58,83 < -40
Audio 59,25 -30,9
Tabla Tabla Tabla Tabla 3 33 3: :: : Nivel de Portadoras Analizador de Espectros N2


Analizador de Espectros N3 Analizador de Espectros N3 Analizador de Espectros N3 Analizador de Espectros N3

Figura 9 Figura 9 Figura 9 Figura 9: :: : Nivel de portadora de video

Figura Figura Figura Figura 10 10 10 10: :: : Nivel de portadora de croma

Figura 11 Figura 11 Figura 11 Figura 11: :: : Nivel de portadora de audio

Este Analizador es muy sencillo ya que solo debemos ajustar a la frecuencia que queramos y
nos muestra en nivel de seal.
Mediciones Mediciones Mediciones Mediciones Analizador de espectros N3 Analizador de espectros N3 Analizador de espectros N3 Analizador de espectros N3
Los resultados de las mediciones son los siguientes:
Portadora Portadora Portadora Portadora Frecuencia(MHz) Frecuencia(MHz) Frecuencia(MHz) Frecuencia(MHz) Nivel (dBmV) Nivel (dBmV) Nivel (dBmV) Nivel (dBmV)
Video 55,25 -8,2
Croma o color 58,83 -35,5
Audio 59,25 -23,8
Tabla Tabla Tabla Tabla 4 44 4: :: : Nivel de Portadoras Analizador de Espectros N3
Comprobacin de mal funcionamiento de cable RS Comprobacin de mal funcionamiento de cable RS Comprobacin de mal funcionamiento de cable RS Comprobacin de mal funcionamiento de cable RS- -- -232 del 232 del 232 del 232 del Analizador de e Analizador de e Analizador de e Analizador de espectros N2 spectros N2 spectros N2 spectros N2

Figura 12 Figura 12 Figura 12 Figura 12: :: : Pruebas de continuidad cable RS-232 PS2
Se realizo esta comprobacin de continuidad en cada unos de los pines del cable RS-232 PS2
ya que fue imposible realizar la conexin del Analizador a la PC, luego de esta prueba
efectivamente estaba daado un pin de transmisin.
COMPARACIN DE LOS ANALIZADORES DE ESPECTROS COMPARACIN DE LOS ANALIZADORES DE ESPECTROS COMPARACIN DE LOS ANALIZADORES DE ESPECTROS COMPARACIN DE LOS ANALIZADORES DE ESPECTROS
Se realizo la comparacin de los equipos utilizados que posee el laboratorio de electrnica y
telecomunicaciones, se tomo en cuenta la frecuencia en la que trabajan, el tipo de interface
que utilizan, el tipo de modulacin que manejan, las unidades y las rasgos mecnicos de cada
unos de los equipos utilizados.
Caractersticas Caractersticas Caractersticas Caractersticas
GSP GSP GSP GSP- -- -830 830 830 830 3GHz 3GHz 3GHz 3GHz
Spectrum Spectrum Spectrum Spectrum Analyzer Analyzer Analyzer Analyzer
PROTEK PROTEK PROTEK PROTEK
3290N/3221N 3290N/3221N 3290N/3221N 3290N/3221N
PROLINK 1 PROLINK 1 PROLINK 1 PROLINK 1- -- -B BB B
Cable TV Analy Cable TV Analy Cable TV Analy Cable TV Analyzer zer zer zer
Rango de medida Rango de medida Rango de medida Rango de medida 0kHz a 3GHz 100kHz a 2900MHz 46 a 870MHz
Interface Interface Interface Interface RS-232 (PC) RS-232 (PC) RS-232 (PRINT)
Demodulacin de Demodulacin de Demodulacin de Demodulacin de
audio audio audio audio
AM, FM N-AM, N-FM, AM, SSB
AM, FM and level
sound
Unidades de Unidades de Unidades de Unidades de
A AA Amplitud mplitud mplitud mplitud
dBm, dBmV, dBuV dBm, dBmV, dBuV dBuV
Rasgos M Rasgos M Rasgos M Rasgos Mecnicos ecnicos ecnicos ecnicos
W. 330 x H. 170 x D.
340 mm
6 kg.
W. 4,0 x H. 9,5 x D.
1,8
1,4 lbs.(No incluye
Batera)
W. 199,5 x H. 60,5 x D.
131,5 mm
1,2 kg. (Incluyendo
Batera)
Tabla Tabla Tabla Tabla 5 55 5: :: : Comparacin de instrumentos de medicin del laboratorio
ANLISIS DE RESULTADOS ANLISIS DE RESULTADOS ANLISIS DE RESULTADOS ANLISIS DE RESULTADOS
ESTAN ESTAN ESTAN ESTANDAR NTSC DAR NTSC DAR NTSC DAR NTSC
La seal de televisin que llega a nuestros receptores debe contener la informacin de
sincronismo vertical, sincronismo horizontal, la imagen en blanco y negro (luminancia), la
informacin del color (crominancia, seales de azul, verde y rojo) y la informacin de sonido
(audio calidad FM).
La norma NTSC ha especificado las seales de informacin de la siguiente forma:
Luminancia (imagen) modulando en amplitud una portadora de 1,25 MHz y
generando un ancho de banda de 4,2 MHz.
Crominancia (color) modulando en cuadratura una subportadora separada 3,58 MHz
de la portadora de luminancia (imagen).

Sonido (audio) modulando en frecuencia una portadora separada 4,5 MHz de la
portadora de luminancia (imagen).
El ancho de banda total de una seal de televisin es de 6 MHz (seal en banda base).
La televisin de libre recepcin se basa en modular portadoras de RF separadas 6 MHz
con la seal descrita anteriormente.
Tolerancias Tcnicas Tolerancias Tcnicas Tolerancias Tcnicas Tolerancias Tcnicas para Televisin. para Televisin. para Televisin. para Televisin.
A continuacin se describe las tolerancias que se deben de cumplir dentro de las mediciones
que se realizo que son muy importantes mantenerlas, ya que de lo contrario los sistemas de
Televisin se ven afectados por las sanciones y sobre todo a lo que se refiere a potencia y
frecuencias las multas son muy altas, de ah de la importancia de mantenerse en los
parmetros que marca la norma. A continuacin me permito detallar los aspectos ms
sobresalientes:
Anchura de ba Anchura de ba Anchura de ba Anchura de banda necesaria nda necesaria nda necesaria nda necesaria.- La anchura de banda ocupada por una emisin de televisin es
de 6 MHz.
Se cumple correctamente con este parmetro.
Separacin entre portadoras de audio y video Separacin entre portadoras de audio y video Separacin entre portadoras de audio y video Separacin entre portadoras de audio y video.- La separacin de la portadora de sonido con
relacin a la portadora de imagen ser de + 4.5 MHz.
YZ[\]^Z[] ^_ `a^_Z YZ[\]^Z[] ^_ `a^_Z Z ac]d_e = 4,5fgh
55,25 fgh 59,75 fgh = 4,5fgh
Se cumple correctamente con este parmetro.
Tolerancia en frecuencia Tolerancia en frecuencia Tolerancia en frecuencia Tolerancia en frecuencia.- Las frecuencias portadoras de video y de audio, debern ser
mantenidas dentro de + 1000 Hz. De las frecuencias asignadas, salvo lo establecido en lo
concerniente a retransmisores de baja potencia.
Se cumple correctamente con este parmetro.
Tolerancia en potencia Tolerancia en potencia Tolerancia en potencia Tolerancia en potencia.- La potencia de salida, aun cuando pueda fluctuar por variaciones en la
lnea de alimentacin de energa elctrica, no debe incrementarse en ms del 10% ni decrecer
en ms del 15% de la potencia autorizada, excepto en los casos de emergencias.
Nmero de Nmero de Nmero de Nmero de
Marcador Marcador Marcador Marcador
Frecuencia Frecuencia Frecuencia Frecuencia
(MHz) (MHz) (MHz) (MHz)
Nivel (dBm) Nivel (dBm) Nivel (dBm) Nivel (dBm)
0 55.25 -67,8
2 58,83 -85,8
1 59,75 -69,2
Tabla Tabla Tabla Tabla 6 66 6: :: : Nivel de potencia de Portadoras
Se cumple correctamente con este parmetro.

CONCLUSIONES CONCLUSIONES CONCLUSIONES CONCLUSIONES
Para la manipulacin de estos instrumentos, primero se debe tener muy claro qu se
va a medir y como estn distribuidas las frecuencias de las portadoras en la televisin,
tanto la portadora de video, croma o color y la de audio.
Pudimos manipular los instrumentos de medicin de acuerdo a lo que necesitbamos
sin antes ver los respectivos manuales de cada uno de los analizadores, debido a eso se
explica muy detalladamente como manipular los equipos, se describe los botones
tanto de analizador fsico como de software del equipo. Facilitando as la comprensin
de cada uno de los equipos utilizados en esta prctica.
Procedimos con lo planificado para realizar las mediciones de las distintas portadoras,
pudiendo recolectar informacin de nivel de intensidad, nivel de potencia en lo que
corresponde al analizador de espectros N2 y N3, as como tambin ver las
portadoras tanto de video, croma y la de audio en el analizador de espectros N1.
Lamentablemente en el analizador porttil llamado para esta prctica Analizador de
espectros N2 no se pudo manipular con el software ya que como se explico
anteriormente, el cable para dicha conexin tenia daado un pin de transmisin.
Una vez obtenidos los datos de canal en estudio [canal 2 (54 MHz 60 MHz)] se
analizo si cumpla con las normas tcnicas dispuestas por el organismo regulador, por
lo que efectivamente cumplan, esto fue comprobado cmo se puede observar en los
anlisis de resultados.
Se compar los aspectos ms importantes entre los tres instrumentos de medicin
como son la frecuencia en la que operan, tipos de modulacin que poseen, las
unidades que manejan y las dimensiones de cada uno de los equipos.

RECOMENDACIONES RECOMENDACIONES RECOMENDACIONES RECOMENDACIONES
La frecuencia de video de acuerdo a las medidas no necesariamente deben coincidir
con los clculos ya que si existe proximidad con otra estacin que opere en el mismo
canal, esta frecuencia de portadora puede desplazarse como se explica a continuacin.

Desplazamiento de frecuencia de video Desplazamiento de frecuencia de video Desplazamiento de frecuencia de video Desplazamiento de frecuencia de video
Con el fin de lograr una buena recepcin en las ciudades cercanas en donde se tengan
tres estaciones que operan el mismo canal, se autoriza que la frecuencia portadora de
video de dos de ellas se deben desplazar en -10kHz o en +10kHz, respectivamente,
como se indica a continuacin en el siguiente ejemplo:
La Frecuencia portadora de video del canal 2 es 55.25 MHz.
La Frecuencia portadora de audio es 59.75 MHz.
La Frecuencia portadora de video del canal 2 (-) es 55.24 MHz.
La Frecuencia portadora de audio es 59.74 MHz.
La Frecuencia portadora de video del canal 2 (+) es 55.26 MHz.
La Frecuencia portadora de audio es 59.76 MHz.
Se realiza esto cuando existen tres ciudades cercanas y para que no interfieran una con otra.
Para la manipulacin de los equipos se recomienda primero revisar los manuales
respectivos si se tiene alguna duda, ya que ah especifican lo pasos detalladamente a
seguir.
Los manuales se los puede ver en ANEXOS ANEXOS ANEXOS ANEXOS

BIBLIOGRAFA BIBLIOGRAFA BIBLIOGRAFA BIBLIOGRAFA
[1] [1] [1] [1]GROB, Bernard: Basic Television Principles and Servicing Basic Television Principles and Servicing Basic Television Principles and Servicing Basic Television Principles and Servicing. McGraw-Hill, 4 edicin. 1975.
[2] [2] [2] [2]TOMASSI, Wayne: Sistemas de Telecomunicaciones Electrnicas Sistemas de Telecomunicaciones Electrnicas Sistemas de Telecomunicaciones Electrnicas Sistemas de Telecomunicaciones Electrnicas. Pearson Educacin, 4 edicin. 2003.


3.0GHz Spectrum Analyzer
GSP-830

USER MANUAL
GW INSTEK PART NO. 82SP-83000MA1



ISO-9001 CERTIFIED MANUFACTURER



This manual contains proprietary information, which is protected by
copyrights. All rights are reserved. No part of this manual may be
photocopied, reproduced or translated to another language without
prior written consent of Good Will company.
The information in this manual was correct at the time of printing.
However, Good Will continues to improve products and reserves
the rights to change specification, equipment, and maintenance
procedures at any time without notice.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Good Will Instrument Co., Ltd.
No. 7-1, Jhongsing Rd., Tucheng City, Taipei County 236, Taiwan.
Table of Contents
3
Table of Contents
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS....................................................6
Safety Symbols .................................................... 6
Safety Guidelines ................................................ 6
GETTING STARTED............................................................9
GSP-830 Characteristics.................................... 10
Package Contents.............................................. 11
Front Panel Overview........................................ 13
Rear Panel Overview ......................................... 16
Display Overview .............................................. 18
Tilt Stand & Power Up ...................................... 20
Error Check ....................................................... 22
Functionality Check ........................................... 23
QUICK REFERENCE..........................................................25
Operation Shortcuts ......................................... 26
Menu Tree ......................................................... 31
Preset Contents................................................. 40
FREQUENCY/SPAN..........................................................41
View Signal (Center and Span).......................... 42
View Signal (Start and Stop) ............................. 44
Full/Zero Span .................................................. 46
Recall the Last Span Setting.............................. 47
AMPLITUDE .....................................................................48
Set Vertical Scale............................................... 49
Amplitude Correction........................................ 52
Use Pre-Amplifier (Optional) ............................ 56
Set Input Impedance......................................... 57
AUTOSET .........................................................................58
How Autoset Works .......................................... 59
Run Autoset ...................................................... 60
Limit vertical search range................................ 61
Limit horizontal view range............................... 61
MARKER...........................................................................62
Activate/de-activate marker .............................. 63
Move marker ..................................................... 65
Show Markers in Table ...................................... 67
GSP-830 User Manual
4
PEAK SEARCH................................................................. 68
Search Signal Peak ............................................ 69
Show Peak Table................................................ 71
TRACE ............................................................................. 73
View traced waveform....................................... 74
Move Marker to Trace ....................................... 76
Run Trace Math ................................................. 78
Select Signal Detection Mode ........................... 80
POWER MEASUREMENT................................................. 82
ACPR Measurement .......................................... 83
OCBW Measurement......................................... 86
N dB Measurement ........................................... 88
Phase Jitter Measurement ................................. 89
LIMIT LINE...................................................................... 90
Edit Limit Line................................................... 91
Run Pass/Fail test ............................................. 94
BANDWIDTH .................................................................. 95
Select RBW (Resolution BandWidth) ................ 96
Select VBW (Video BandWidth) ........................ 98
RBW/VBW Auto Mode Contents ....................... 99
Set Sweep time................................................ 101
Average Waveform........................................... 101
TRIGGER ........................................................................103
Select Trigger Type .......................................... 104
Select Trigger Mode ........................................ 105
Set Trigger Delay ............................................. 106
DISPLAY .........................................................................107
Change Display Brightness ............................. 108
Activate Display Line....................................... 108
Enter Display Title........................................... 109
Use Split Display ............................................. 110
Use VGA Output ............................................. 111
Save Display Image to USB Flash Drive .......... 111
FILE ................................................................................113
File Location and File Type.............................. 114
Copy File ......................................................... 115
Delete File ....................................................... 118
Rename File .................................................... 120
Table of Contents
5
Save Display Image to USB Flash Drive .......... 121
PRESET........................................................................... 123
SYSTEM.......................................................................... 124
Save/Recall Panel Setting ............................... 125
Configure Communication Interface ............... 126
View System Information ................................ 128
Set Date/Time................................................. 132
Synchronize GSP-830 with Other Devices....... 133
Select Language .............................................. 135
Use Auxiliary Signal ........................................ 135
Enter Service Operation .................................. 135
SEQUENCE .................................................................... 136
Edit Sequence ................................................. 137
Run Sequence ................................................. 140
TRACKING GENERATOR ................................................ 142
DEMODULATOR ............................................................ 144
EMI FILTER..................................................................... 146
BATTERY / DC OPERATION ........................................... 148
Battery Operation............................................ 148
DC Operation.................................................. 149
PC SOFTWARE ............................................................... 150
Install Software ............................................... 151
Connect Software ............................................ 152
Use Software ................................................... 154
REMOTE CONTROL ....................................................... 157
Configure Interface ......................................... 158
Command Syntax ............................................ 160
Command Set ................................................. 161
FAQ................................................................................ 171
Appendix ........................................................................ 172
GSP-830 Specifications ................................... 172
Optional Items Specifications......................... 174
Declaration of Conformity............................... 176
INDEX ............................................................................ 177

GSP-830 User Manual
6
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
This chapter contains important safety instructions that
you must follow when operating the GSP-830 and when
keeping it in storage. Read the following before operating
this instrument to ensure your safety and to keep the
GSP-830 in best condition.
Safety Symbols
These safety symbols may appear in this manual or on the GSP-830.

WARNING
Warning: Identifies conditions or practices that could
result in injury or loss of life.
CAUTION
Caution: Identifies conditions or practices that could
result in damage to the GSP-830 or to other properties.

DANGER High Voltage

Attention Refer to the Manual

Protective Conductor Terminal

Earth (ground) Terminal
Safety Guidelines

General Guideline
CAUTION
Make sure that the RF input level and the Tracking
Generator output reversed power level do not exceed
+30dBm.
Do not supply an input signal to the Tracking Generator
output.
Do not place any heavy object on the GSP-830.
Avoid severe impacts or rough handling that leads to
damaging the GSP-830.
Do not discharge static electricity onto the GSP-830.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
7

Use only mating connectors, not bare wires, for the
terminals.
Do not block or obstruct the cooling fan vent opening.
Do not perform measurement at a power generating source
or building installation site (Note below).
Do not disassemble the GSP-830 unless you are technically
qualified.

(Note) EN 61010-1:2001 specifies the measurement categories and
their requirements as follows. The GSP-830 falls under category II.
Measurement category IV is for measurement performed at the
source of low-voltage installation.
Measurement category III is for measurement performed in the
building installation.
Measurement category II is for measurement performed on the
circuits directly connected to the low voltage installation.
Power Supply
WARNING
AC Input voltage: 100 to 240 V AC, 50/60Hz, 90W
maximum
DC Input voltage: 12V DC, 40W maximum
The power supply voltage should not fluctuate more than
10%.
Connect the protective grounding conductor of the AC
power cord to an earth ground, to avoid electrical shock.
Battery
CAUTION
Rating: 11.1V lithium-ion battery pack x 2
Turn off the main power switch before installing or taking
out the battery packs.
Fuse
WARNING
Fuse type: T1.6A/ 250V, time-delay, 5x20mm glass
To ensure fire protection, replace the fuse only with the
specified type and rating.
Disconnect the power cord before fuse replacement.
Make sure the cause of fuse blowout is fixed before fuse
replacement.
Cleaning the
GSP-830
Disconnect the power cord before cleaning.
Use a soft cloth dampened in a solution of mild detergent
and water. Do not spray any liquid into the GSP-830.
Do not use chemicals or cleaners containing harsh
products such as benzene, toluene, xylene, and acetone.
Operation
Environment
Location: indoor, no direct sunlight, dust free, almost
non-conductive pollution (Note below)
Relative Humidity: < 90%
Altitude: < 2000m
Temperature: 18C to 28C
Storage
Environment
Location: indoor
Relative humidity: < 85%
Temperature: 0C to 40C
GSP-830 User Manual
8

(Note) EN 61010-1:2001 specifies the pollution degrees and their
requirements as follows. The GSP-830 falls under degree 2.
Pollution refers to addition of foreign matter, solid, liquid, or
gaseous (ionized gases), that may produce a reduction of dielectric
strength or surface resistivity.
Pollution degree 1: No pollution or only dry, non-conductive pollution
occurs. The pollution has no influence.
Pollution degree 2: Normally only non-conductive pollution occurs.
Occasionally, however, a temporary conductivity caused by
condensation must be expected.
Pollution degree 3: Conductive pollution occurs, or dry,
non-conductive pollution occurs which becomes conductive due to
condensation which is expected. In such conditions, equipment is
normally protected against exposure to direct sunlight, precipitation,
and full wind pressure, but neither temperature nor humidity is
controlled.
Power cord for the United Kingdom
When using the GSP-830 in the United Kingdom, make sure the power cord
meets the following safety instructions.

NOTE: This lead / appliance must only be wired by competent persons
WARNING: THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE EARTHED
IMPORTANT: The wires in this lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:
Green/ Yellow: Earth
Blue: Neutral
Brown: Live (Phase)

As the colours of the wires in mains leads may not correspond with the colour markings
identified in your plug/appliance, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured Green & Yellow must be connected to the Earth terminal
marked with the letter E or by the earth symbol or coloured Green or Green & Yellow.
The wire which is coloured Blue must be connected to the terminal which is marked with
the letter N or coloured Blue or Black.
The wire which is coloured Brown must be connected to the terminal marked with the
letter L or P or coloured Brown or Red.
If in doubt, consult the instructions provided with the equipment or contact the supplier.
This cable/appliance should be protected by a suitably rated and approved HBC mains
fuse: refer to the rating information on the equipment and/or user instructions for details.
As a guide, cable of 0.75mm
2
should be protected by a 3A or 5A fuse. Larger conductors
would normally require 13A types, depending on the connection method used.
Any moulded mains connector that requires removal /replacement must be destroyed by
removal of any fuse & fuse carrier and disposed of immediately, as a plug with bared wires
is hazardous if a engaged in live socket. Any re-wiring must be carried out in accordance
with the information detailed on this label.
GETTING STARTED
9
GETTING STARTED
This chapter describes the GSP-830 in a nutshell,
including its main features, package contents, and front /
rear / display panel introduction. After going through
the overview, follow the Power-up sequence and
Functionality check section to properly setup the
GSP-830.



GSP-830
package
GSP-830 Characteristics ......................................... 10
Package Contents ................................................... 11
Panel
introduction
Front Panel Overview ............................................. 13
Rear Panel Overview .............................................. 16
Display Overview.................................................... 18
Status Icon overview .............................................. 19
Setup Tilt stand................................................................ 20
Power Up................................................................ 20
Error Check ............................................................ 22
Functionality Check ................................................ 23
GSP-830 User Manual
10
GSP-830 Characteristics
The GSP-830 is a mid-to-high range digital storage
spectrum analyzer suitable for a wide variety of
applications, such as production testing, research, and
field verification.

Performance Low noise floor: typical -117dBm @1GHz, 3k RBW
Fast sweep: 50ms to 25.6s
Compact size: 330(W) x 170(H) x 340(D) mm
Light weight: approx. 6kg
Features Autoset
5 markers with delta marker and peak functions
3 traces
Power measurements: ACPR, OCBW, N-dB, Phase
Jitter
Pass/fail test with limit line editing
Split windows with separate settings
Sequence programming (user-defined macro)
6.4 TFT color LCD, 640 x 480 resolution
Phone output (available in the optional Demodulator)
AC/DC/battery multi-mode power operation
Interface USB host for storage device connection
USB slave/RS232/GPIB(optional) for PC software
connection and remote control
Direct VGA display image output
Reference signal input/output for synchronization
External trigger signal input
Optional Items
(complete list on
the next page)
Tracking Generator
Pre-amplifier GAP-801 (10dB typical, 9kHz to 6GHz)
Pre-amplifier GAP-802 (20dB typical, 9kHz to 3GHz)
1ppm stability module
EMI filter with 9kHz/120kHz RBW and 6-dB
bandwidth
Battery pack
Demodulator
300Hz/10kHz/100kHz RBW
GPIB interface
GETTING STARTED
11
Package Contents
Contact your dealer in case of missing items. The detailed specifications are
listed from page172.

GSP-830

Standard
accessories
Power cord
USB cable (Type A to Type B) for PC connection
User Manual (this document)
Optional items Option01 Tracking Generator (factory installed)
Option02 Battery Pack
Option03 1ppm Stability Module (factory installed)
Option04 300Hz RBW (factory installed)
Option05 9kHz & 120kHz RBW (also called EMI Filter,
factory installed)
Option06 10kHz & 100kHz RBW (factory installed)
Option07 Demodulator (factory installed)
Option08 GPIB Interface (factory installed)
Note: Among Option 05, 06, and 07, only one can be
installed at a time.
ADP-001 BNC(J/F) to N(P/M) Adaptor Optional
accessories
ADP-002 SMA(J/F) to N(P/M) Adaptor
ADP-101 BNC(J/F)75 to BNC(P/M)50 Adaptor
ATA-001 BNC Antenna
ATN-100 10dB Attenuator N(J/F)-N(P/M)
GAK-001 Terminator 50 N(P/M)
GAK-002 Cap with Chain N(P/M)
GAP-801 Pre-Amplifier, 9kHz to 6GHz, 10dB typical
GAP-802 Pre-Amplifier, 9kHz to 3GHz, 20dB typical
GSP-830 User Manual
12
GKT-001 General Kit Set
ADP-002: SMA (J/F) to N (P/M) Adaptor x 2
ATN-100: 10dB Attenuator x 1
GTL-303: RF Cable Assembly (RD316, SMA(P),60cm) x2
GSC-002: Kit box

GKT-002 CATV Kit Set
ADP-001: BNC (J/F) to N (P/M) Adaptor x 2
ADP-101: BNC(P/M) 50 to BNC(J/F) 75 adaptor x2
GTL-304: RF Cable Assembly (RG223,N(P)-N(J),30cm) x2
GSC-003: Kit box

GKT-003 RLB Kit Set
GAK-001: Termination, N(P), 50 x 1
GAK-002: Cap with Chain, N(P) x 1
GTL-302: RF Cable Assembly (RG223, N(P), 30cm) x2
GSC-004: Kit box

GKT-006 EMI Probe Set
ADP-01: Adaptor, BNC(J/F) - N(P/M) x 1
ADP-02: Adaptor, SMA(J/F) N(P/M) x 1
ANT-01: 6cm Loop, H-Field Probe x 1
ANT-02: 3cm Loop, H-Field Probe x 1
ANT-03: 6mm Loop, H-Field Probe x 1
PR-03: Touch Passive Probe, < 3GHz x 1
Test Lead: RF Cable Assembly BNC(P/M)-BNC(P/M)x1
Test Lead: RF Cable Assembly SMA(P/M)-SMA(P/M)x1
GRA-404 19 Inch Rack Adaptor Panel, 4U
GSC-001 Soft Carrying Case
GTL-301 RF Cable Assembly, RG223, N(P/M), 1000mm
GTL-302 RF Cable Assembly, RG223, N(P/M), 300mm
GTL-303 RF Cable Assembly, RD316, SMA(P/J), 600mm
GTL-304 RF Cable Assembly, RG223, N(P/M) to N(J/F),
300mm
GTL-401 DC Power Line with Lighter Plug, 5A
RLB-001 Return Loss Bridge
GETTING STARTED
13
Front Panel Overview

LCD Display TFT Color display, 640x480 resolution. For display setting
details, see page107.
F1 to F6 Function
Keys
F 1
to
F 6

Soft keys linked to the menu that appears
on the right side of the display.
Main Keys
Frequency
Span
Amplitude
Autoset

Frequency key (page41), together with
Span key, configures the horizontal
(frequency) scale.
Amplitude key (page48) configures the
vertical (amplitude) scale and input
impedance.
Autoset key (page58) automatically
searches the peak signal with maximum
amplitude and displays it with appropriate
horizontal and vertical scales.
GSP-830 User Manual
14
Measurement
keys
Limit Line
Meas
Trace
Peak Search
Marker

Marker key (page62) activates markers
and places them on specified locations.
Peak Search key (page68) searches peak
signals and configures peak ranges/orders.
Trace key (page73) activates trace signals,
configures them, and runs trace math
operations.
Measurement key (page82) configures
and runs 4 types of Power Measurements:
ACPR, OCBW, N-dB, and Phase Jitter.
Limit Line key (page90) configures
high/low limit lines and runs the pass/fail
test.
Control keys
Display
BW
Trigger
File

BW key (page95) configures the
RBW/VBW width, sweep time length, and
waveform averaging number.
Trigger key (page103) selects the trigger
type, sets the trigger running mode / delay
/ frequency, and activates the external
trigger input.
Display key (page107) configures the
LCD dimmer, edits and shows the display
line and title, and activates split windows.
File key (page113) saves/recalls/deletes
the trace waveform, limit line, amplitude
correction, sequence, and panel settings.
Display images may be saved to a storage
device via the front panel USB port.
State Keys
Seq
Option
System
Preset

Preset key (page40or123) resets the
GSP-830 to a predefined state.
System key configures the date/time
(page132), GPIB/RS232C interface
(page126), and language (page135). It also
shows the system information (page128)
and self test result (page131), and
saves/recalls panel settings (page125).
Option key configures the Tracking
Generator (page142), Demodulator
(page144), battery (page148), and external
reference frequency (page133).
Seq key (page136) edits and runs
sequences (user-defined macro).
GETTING STARTED
15
Power Key

Power key selects the power state between
the standby mode (Red LED on) and
power on mode (Green LED on). To turn
on/off the main power, use the power
switch on the rear panel. See page20 for
the power up sequence.
Arrow Keys Arrow keys select parameters in various
occasions; Up/Right for increasing,
Down/Left for decreasing.
Scroll Knob

Scroll knob sets or selects parameters in
various occasions. In many cases, it works
in tandem with the Arrow keys.
Input Terminal
RF INPUT 50
+30dBm MAX
MAX DC 25V

Input terminal accepts RF input signals.
Maximum +30dBm
Input impedance 50
Pre-Amplifier
Power Supply
Terminal
100mA MAX.
DC 9V
OUTPUT

Pre-amplifier power supply terminal
provides power for the optional GAP-801
or GAP-802 pre-amplifier. For details, see
page56.
Numerical keys set various parameters. In many cases, they
work in tandem with the Arrow keys and Scroll knob.
Numerical Keys
Unit Keys
Enter Key
BK SP key
Example Key sequence
9kHz

3.8dB

1.0mS

9 + Enter

Correction

Optional TG
Output Terminal
TG OUTPUT 50
MAX DC 25V
Outputs the optional Tracking Generator
signal. Reversed power should not exceed
+30dBm. For details, see page142.
USB Host
Connector

Via the USB port (typeA male), display
images may be saved to or recalled from
USB flash drives For details, see page113.
GSP-830 User Manual
16
Rear Panel Overview


Frequency
Adjustment Point
FREQ.
ADJUST

Adjusts the internal reference signal
frequency; for service operation only.
GPIB Connector
(Optional)

Optional 24 pin female GPIB connector for
remote control (page157). For interface
setting details, see page127.
USB Connector

Type B mini connector for PC software
connection (page150) and remote control
(page157). For interface setting details, see
page126.
RS232C
Connector

9 pin female connector for PC software
connection (page150) and remote control
(page157). For interface setting details, see
page126.
Phone Output
(Optional)
PHONE

3.5mm phone jack for audio output.
Available when the optional Demodulator is
installed. For details, see page144.
GETTING STARTED
17
Battery Pack
(Optional)

Stores the optional battery packs for
portable usage. For details, see page148.
Main Power
Switch,
Fuse Socket,
Power Cord
Socket

The main power switch turns on/off the
GSP-830 main power. For the power up
sequence, see page20.
The fuse socket stores the main fuse, T1.6A
250V, time-delay, 5x20mm glass.
The power cord socket accepts the AC
power cord, 100 to 240V, 50/60Hz.
For power and fuse related safety
instructions, see page6.
DC Power Input
DC 12V
INPUT
40W MAX.

DC power input, 12V, 40W max rating.
Accepts a standard 2.1mm DC plug or the
optional GTL-401 DC power cord. For
details, see page149.
VGA Output

15pin, female VGA connector which
outputs 640 x 480 resolution display image
to an external monitor. For details, see
page111.
External Trigger
Input
EXT. TRIG.
INPUT

Accepts a trigger signal from an
external device. For details, see
page103.
Reference Output
10MHz
REF OUTPUT

Outputs +5V TTL, 10MHz
reference signal used for
synchronizing the GSP-830 with
an external device. For details, see
page133.
Reference Input
REF INPUT

Accepts a TTL signal from an
external device, used for
synchronization with the
GSP-830. For details, see
page134.
GSP-830 User Manual
18
Display Overview


A Traces &
Waveforms
Input signals and traces that appear within the main
display area. Input signal & TraceA: Green, TraceB: Red,
TraceC: Yellow. For trace details, see page73.
B Title The title of the current display. For details, see page109.
C Reference
Level/Scale
The reference amplitude level and vertical scale. For
amplitude details, see page48.
D Marker
Information
The frequency and amplitude for the active marker /
delta marker. For marker details, see page62.
E Function Menu The menu associated with F1 to F6 function keys on the
right side of the display.
F Date and Time Current date and time. For setup details, see page132.
G Frequency/
Bandwidth
Upper line: shows the start/stop frequency (page44) and
center frequency (page42).
Lower line: shows the VBW (video bandwidth - page98),
RBW (resolution bandwidth - page96), frequency span
(page42), and sweep time (page101).
GETTING STARTED
19
H Status Icon The icons showing various system conditions. See the
below Status Icon overview for details.
I Test Result/
Error Message
The result of the pass/fail test using limit lines (page94)
or the system error messages (page128).
J Command
Window
Shows the current status of the selected menu or the
entered parameters such as frequency and amplitude.
Status Icon overview

Amplitude
(page48)

External gain on, amplitude correction on, Input
impedance 75, Input impedance calibration on
Peak Search
(page68)

Peak track on
TraceA:green , B:red , C:yellow

Clear mode Average on
Trace (page73)

Peak hold mode View mode, trace math
BW (page95)

RBW, VBW manual
mode
Sweep time manual mode
Trigger (page103)

Video trigger mode External trigger signal on

Fully charged 50% to 25% Battery level
(page148)

75% to 50% Less than 25%
Options

TG normalization
activated (page142)
External reference signal
used (page133)


1ppm stability module installed (page133)
Sequence(page136)

Sequence currently running
USB

USB flash drive is detected (page114), or USB
remote control connection is detected (page158)
GSP-830 User Manual
20
Tilt Stand & Power Up

Tilt stand
Low angle


High angle

Power Up
1. Connect the power cord to the
rear panel socket.


2. Turn on the main power switch.


3. The ON/STBY key on the front
panel turns red.

4. Press the ON/STBY key. Its
color turns green and the display
becomes active.

GETTING STARTED
21
At the initial state, only the F3 menu
Last stored state becomes available.
For details of storing the panel
settings, see page125.
Last
stored
state
F 3

Last Stored
Settings
To recall the last stored panel settings:
Press F3. One of the panel settings from S1 S10,
which was stored the last time, will be recalled.

To use the GSP-830 without recalling the last stored
panel settings:
Press any other function keys (see below).

List of function keys
Frequency
Span
Amplitude
Autoset
Limit Line
Meas
Trace
Peak Search
Marker
Display
BW
Trigger
File Seq
Option
System
Preset

Note Ignore the error message that might appear at the
bottom of the display when powering up the GSP-830.
The message indicates that internal configurations are
ongoing. For error message details, see page22.
GSP-830 User Manual
22
Error Check
This section assumes that the GSP-830 is already powered up (page20).

1. Check system
error
Check for error messages at the bottom of the display,
next to the command window.
Cent er : 1. 5GHz (EXT Unlock)
EXT
Unlock

Contact the service center if any of the following
messages remains in the display.

Amp
Uncal

Inappropriate RBW or VBW is selected.
Frequency is less than 15MHz and
amplitude is less than 30dBm.

EXT
Unlock

External reference input is not working
properly.

LO1
Unlock

Local oscillator 1 is not working properly.

LO3
Unlock

Local oscillator 3 is not working properly.

Med
Unlock

1ppm stability signal is not working
properly. Appears only when the optional
1ppm stability module is installed.

Ref
Unlock

Internal reference signal is not working
properly.
2. Check sel f test
resul t
View the GSP-830s self-diagnosis test result. Press the
System keyF6 (More) F2 (Self Test).
Self Test... F 2 More... F 6 System

The test automatically runs at each power-up. The
underline shows the result, pass or fail. Contact the
service center if any of the items fails.
GPIB
Pass Fail
F 1

GPIB module connectivity
(available only when installed)
Flash
Pass Fail
F 2

Internal Flash memory for storing
the system code/data
GETTING STARTED
23
SDRAM
Pass Fail
F 3

Internal SDRAM for running the
system code
RTC
Pass Fail
F 4

Internal real time clock for
configuring the date and time
Functionality Check

This section assumes that the GSP-830 is already
powered up (page20).
Before operating the GSP-830 in a new environment,
run these steps to make sure it is functionally stable.
1. Feed a signal Input a signal to check if the GSP-830 correctly shows
the waveform on the display. There are two ways to feed
an input signal.
Feeding the DUT signal
If the DUT is already available, connect the output signal
to the RF input terminal. The signal amplitude must be
less than +30dBm.

Feeding the internal auxiliary signal
You can also use the internal auxiliary signal,
100MHz/30dBm. No cable connection is required in
this case. Activate the signal by pressing the System key
F4 (Aux Sig On).
Aux Sig
On Off
F 4 System

GSP-830 User Manual
24
2. View the
signal
Press the Autoset keyF1 (Autoset).
Autoset Autoset F 1

The GSP-830 automatically configures the horizontal and
vertical scales and shows the signal on the display.

Check the peak frequency and amplitude that appear on
the top right corner of the display. To move the marker,
use the Scroll knob or Left/Right keys .
Internal auxiliary signal, -30dBm @100MHz
Peak frequency/amplitude

If the displayed value does not match the actual signal,
contact the service center.
QUICK REFERENCE
25
QUICK REFERENCE

Shortcuts Power-on screen.....................................................26
Frequency and Span ...............................................26
Amplitude...............................................................26
Autoset ...................................................................26
Marker ....................................................................26
Peak Search............................................................27
Trace.......................................................................27
Power Measurement...............................................27
Limit Line ...............................................................28
Bandwidth ..............................................................28
Trigger ....................................................................28
Display ...................................................................28
File .........................................................................29
System....................................................................29
Option....................................................................30
Sequence................................................................30
Menu Tree Power-on screen.....................................................31
Frequency, Span, Autoset, Amplitude(1 of 2) .........31
Amplitude (2 of 2), Marker.....................................32
Peak Search, Trace..................................................33
Measurement, Limit Line .......................................34
BW, Trigger, Display................................................35
File (1 of 2) ............................................................36
System....................................................................38
Option, Sequence...................................................39
Preset Preset Contents ......................................................40
GSP-830 User Manual
26
Operation Shortcuts
Here is the list of available operations and their shortcuts.
Power-on screen

Recall the last stored settings
F3
Frequency and Span

Set Center Frequency and Span FrequencyF1SpanF1
Set Start and Stop Frequency FrequencyF2(Start), F3(Stop)
Set Frequency Step FrequencyF4
Activate Full Span (3.0GHz) SpanF2
Activate Zero Span (Time Domain) SpanF3
Recall Last Span SpanF4
Amplitude

Set Reference Level AmplitudeF1
Select Vertical Scale AmplitudeF2
Select Unit (dBm/dBmV/dBuV) AmplitudeF3F1 to F3
Set External Gain AmplitudeF4
Activate Amplitude Correction AmplitudeF5F2
Select Amplitude Correction Set AmplitudeF5F1F1
Delete Amplitude Correction Item AmplitudeF5F1F2
Delete Amplitude Correction Set AmplitudeF5F1F3F2
Undo Correction Item/Set Deletion AmplitudeF5F1F4
Save Amplitude Correction Set AmplitudeF5F1F5
Select Input Impedance (50/75) AmplitudeF6F1
Set Input Impedance Offset AmplitudeF6F2
Autoset

Run Autoset AutosetF1
Set Amplitude Floor AutosetF2
Set Frequency View Span AutosetF3
Marker

Activate Normal Marker MarkerF1F2
QUICK REFERENCE
27
Activate Delta Marker MarkerF1F2F3
Activate All Normal Markers MarkerF6F3
Move Marker to Peak MarkerF4 or Peak Search
Move Marker and Peak to Center MarkerF4F5 or Peak SearchF5
Track Marker on Peak Peak SearchF6F4
Move Marker to Various Locations MarkerF6F4F1 to F5
Show Marker Table MarkerF6F2
Put Marker on Trace MarkerF6F1
Peak Search

Search Peak Signal Peak Search or MarkerF4
Search Next Peak Peak SearchF2
Search Next Peak to Right Peak SearchF3
Search Next Peak to Left Peak SearchF4
Search Peak and Move to Center Peak SearchF5 or MarkerF4F5
Track Marker on Peak Peak SearchF6F4
Search Minimum Amplitude Peak SearchF6F5
Show Peak Table Peak SearchF6F1
Sort Peaks in Peak Table Peak SearchF6F2
Set Peak Threshold Peak SearchF6F3
Trace

Activate Trace TraceF1
Clear Trace (Update in Real-Time) TraceF2
View Peak Hold Trace TraceF3
Freeze Trace TraceF4
Hide Trace TraceF5
View Averaged Trace TraceF6F1 or BWF4
Run Trace Math TraceF6F2F1 to F5
Select Signal Detection Mode TraceF6F3F1 to F5
Power Measurement

Activate ACPR MeasF2
Set ACPR Channel Bandwidth MeasF1F1
Set ACPR Channel Space MeasF1F2
Set ACPR Adjacent Channel Offset MeasF1F4F2 and F4
GSP-830 User Manual
28
Set ACPR Adjacent Channel BW MeasF1F4F1 and F3
Move ACPR Channel Up MeasF4
Move ACPR Channel Down MeasF5
Activate OCBW MeasF3
Set OCBW Channel Bandwidth MeasF1F1
Set OCBW Channel Space MeasF1F2
Set OCBW % MeasF1F3
Move OCBW Channel Up MeasF4
Move OCBW Channel Down MeasF5
Activate N dB MeasF6F1
Set N dB Value MeasF6F2
Activate Phase Jitter MeasF6F3
Set Phase Jitter Offset MeasF6F4F1(Start), F2(Stop)
Limit Line

Activate Limit Line Limit LineF1 (High), F2 (Low)
Select Limit Line for Edit Limit LineF3F1
Activate Limit Line Edit Table Limit LineF3F2
Delete Limit Line Table Item Limit LineF3F3
Delete All Table Item Limit LineF3F4F2
Undo Last Deletion Limit LineF3F5
Run Pass/Fail Test Limit LineF4
Select Pass/Fail Condition Limit LineF5
Bandwidth

Select RBW BWF1
Select VBW BWF2
Set Sweep Time BWF3
Set Trace Average Number BWF4 or TraceF6F1
Reset RBW/VBW/Sweep to Auto BWF5
Trigger

Select Free Run (Default) TriggerF1
Select Video/External Trigger TriggerF2
Select Trigger Mode TriggerF3
Set Trigger Delay TriggerF4
QUICK REFERENCE
29
Set Trigger Frequency TriggerF5
Run Trigger (in Single/Continuous) TriggerF6
Display

Change Dimmer Level DisplayF1
Show Display Line DisplayF2
Clear Title DisplayF3F1
Enter Title DisplayF3F2 to F4
Show Title DisplayF3F5
Activate Split Window DisplayF4F1 (Upper), F2 (Lower)
Alternate Upper/Lower Sweep DisplayF4F3
Switch Split Display to Full Screen DisplayF4F4
File

Select Copy Source File FileF1F1F1 to F5
Select Copy Destination File F2F1 to F5 (After Selecting Source)
Edit Copied File Name
F3 (After Selecting Destination)
Copy Selected File
F4 (After Selecting Source/Destination)
Select File for Deletion FileF2F1F1 to F5
Delete Selected File
F2 (After Selecting File)
Rename File FileF3F1
Confirm New File Name
F2 (After Renaming File)
Save Display Image to USB Drive FileF4F1F2
Rename File in USB Drive FileF4F1F1
Select System Code for Update FileF5F1F1
Select Language for Update FileF5F1F2
Update System File from USB Drive
F2 (After Selecting File)
Preset

Recall Factory Installed Settings
Preset
System

Save Setup SystemF1F1 or F2F3
Recall Setup SystemF1F1 or F2F4
Select GPIB Address SystemF2
Show RS-232C Configuration SystemF3F1 to F4
Activate Auxiliary Signal SystemF4
GSP-830 User Manual
30
Set Date SystemF6F1F1F1 to F4
Set Time SystemF6F1F2F1 to F3
Activate Clock Display SystemF6F1F3
View Self Test Result SystemF6F2
View System Configuration SystemF6F4
Select Language SystemF6F5F1
Option

Activate Tracking Generator OptionF1F1
Set Tracking Generator Amplitude OptionF1F2
Normalize Tracking Generator OptionF1F3F2
Activate Normalized TG OptionF1F4
Set Ref Level for TG Normalization OptionF1F5
Activate FM Demodulator OptionF2F1
Activate AM Demodulator OptionF2F2
Activate Phone Output OptionF2F3
Set Phone Output Volume OptionF2F4
Set Squelch Level OptionF2F5
View Battery Level OptionF3
Set Ext. Reference Signal Frequency OptionF4
Sequence

Select Sequence Set SequenceF1, F2
Start Sequence Edit SequenceF3F1
Insert 100ms Delay SequenceF3F2
Insert Pause in Sequence SequenceF3F3
Insert Another Sequence Set SequenceF3F4F1 to F2
Stop Sequence Edit SequenceF3F5
Insert Item to Sequence Set SequenceF3F6F1
Save Sequence Set SequenceF3F6F2
Delete Sequence Item SequenceF3F6F3
Delete Sequence Set SequenceF3F6F4F2
Undo Sequence Item/Set Delete SequenceF3F6F5
Select Sequence Run Mode SequenceF4F1
Run Sequence SequenceF4F2
Delete All Sequence Set SequenceF5F2
QUICK REFERENCE
31
Menu Tree
Power-on screen

Last
stored
state
F 3

Frequency, Span, Autoset, Amplitude(1 of 2)

Center
1.5 GHz
F 1
Start
0 kHz
F 2
Stop
3 GHz
F 3
Step
1 MHz
F 4
Frequency

Span
3 GHz
F 1
Full Span F 2
Zero Span F 3
Last Span F 4
Span

Span
Auto Man
F 3
Autoset F 1
Autoset
Amp.Floor
Auto Man
F 2

Ref.Level
0 dBm
F 1
Scale dB/Div
10 5 2 1
F 2
Units... F 3
Ext.Gain
0dB
F 4
Corrections.. F 5
More F 6
dBm F 1
dBmV F 2
dBuV F 3
Return F 6
Amplitude

GSP-830 User Manual
32
Amplitude (2 of 2), Marker



QUICK REFERENCE
33
Peak Search, Trace

Pk Search F 1
Next Peak F 2
Next Pk
Right
F 3
Next Pk
Left
F 4
More F 6
Peak Table
On Off
F 1
Pk Threshold
On Off
F 3
Track
On Off
F 4
Return F 6
Mkr Center F 5 Min Search F 5
Peak Search
Peak Sort
Freq Amp
F 2

Clear F 2
Peak Hold F 3
View F 4
Blank F 5
More F 6
AVG
On Off
20
F 1
Trace Math.. F 2
Detection.. F 3
Return F 6
Normal F 1
Sample F 2
Peak+ F 3
AVG F 4
Return F 6
A B F 1
A+B A F 2
Return F 6
QPeak F 5
A-B A F 3
A+const A F 4
Trace
Trace
A B C
F 1
A-const A F 5

GSP-830 User Manual
34
Measurement, Limit Line

CH Up F 4
CH Down F 5
More F 6
Channel
Setup...
F 1
N dB F 2
CH BW F 1
CH SPC F 2
OCBW % F 3
ADJ CH
Offset...
F 4
Return F 6
Adj CH BW1 F 1
Adj CH Offs1 F 2
Return F 6
Adj CH BW2 F 3
Adj CH Offs2 F 4
Phase Jitter
On Off
F 3
Phase Jitter
Setup..
F 4
Return F 6
Start
Offset
F 1
Stop
Offset
F 2
Return F 6
Meas
ACPR
On Off
F 2
OCBW
On Off
F 3
N dB BW
On Off
F 1

Edit... F 3
Edit Table
On Off
F 2
Delete F 3
No F 1
Yes F 2
Return F 6
Delete All.. F 4
Undelete F 5
Limit Line
H Limit
On Off
F 1
L Limit
On Off
F 2
Pass/Fail
On Off
F 4
Pass/Fail
___
F 5
Limit
Low High
F 1

QUICK REFERENCE
35
BW, Trigger, Display

RBW
Auto Man
F 1
VBW
Auto Man
F 2
All Auto F 5
BW
Swp Tm
Auto Man
F 3
AVG
On Off
20
F 4

Free Run F 1
Trigger Mode
Nor. Sgl. Cont.
F 3
Trigger Freq
1.5GHz
F 5
Trigger
Trigger
Condition
Video Ext.
F 2
Trigger Delay
50ms
F 4
Run Now F 6

LCD Dimmer F 1
(Capital
Letter)
F 2
Title... F 3
Split
Window...
F 4
Return F 6
Clear Title F 1
Show Title F 5
Upper F 1
Lower F 2
Return F 6
(Small
Letter)
F 3
(Symbol) F 4
Alternate
Sweep
F 3
Full Screen F 4
Display
Display Line
On Off
F 2

GSP-830 User Manual
36
File (1 of 2)

Copy... F 1
Source.. F 1
Destination.. F 2
Return F 6
Delete... F 2
Rename... F 3
Print Screen.. F 4
Return F 6
Edit File Name
On Off
F 3
Copy Now F 4
Return F 6
Type... F 1
Delete Now F 2
File
Trace
Int. Ext.
F 1
Limit
Int. Ext.
F 2
Correction
Int. Ext.
F 3
Seq.
Int. Ext.
F 4
Setup
Int. Ext.
F 5
Update
From
Flash Drive
F 5
Return F 6
Trace
Int. Ext.
F 1
Limit
Int. Ext.
F 2
Correction
Int. Ext.
F 3
Seq.
Int. Ext.
F 4
Setup
Int. Ext.
F 5

QUICK REFERENCE
37
File (2 of 2)

Copy... F 1
Delete... F 2
Rename... F 3
Print Screen.. F 4
Return F 6
F 1
Return F 6 Return F 6
Print Now F 2
To Ext.
Memory...
F 1
File
Confirm F 2
Edit File Name
On Off
F 1
Edit File Name
On Off
Update
From
Flash Drive
F 5
Return F 6 Return F 6
Multi
Language
F 2
Type... F 1 F 1 System Code
Update Now F 2

Preset

Preset

(No menu item)
GSP-830 User Manual
38
System

Serial Port.. F 3
Service... F 5
RF Diagno... F 3
Return F 6
System
Clock...
F 1
Self Test... F 2
Return F 6
Date... F 1
Time... F 2
(English) F 1
Return F 6 Return F 6
GPIB
Pass Fail
F 1
Flash
Pass Fail
F 2
Year F 1
Month F 2
Day F 3
Return F 6
Hour F 1
Minute F 2
Second F 3
Return F 6
Language F 5
System Config
On Off
F 4
GPIB Add
2
F 2
More... F 6
Clock
On Off
F 3
SDRAM
Pass Fail
F 3
RTC
Pass Fail
F 4
Return F 6
Setup
6 7 8 9 10
F 2
Save/Recall
Setup..
F 1
Save Now F 3
Recall Now F 4
Stop
1
F 3
Return F 6
Baud
57600
F 1
Parity
None
F 2
Data
8
F 4
*
System
*
Setup
1 2 3 4 5
F 1
Day of
Week
F 4
Aux Sig
On Off
F 4

* Submenu only for service personnel
QUICK REFERENCE
39
Option, Sequence

TG... F 1
Demod... F 2
Battery F 3
TG
On Off
F 1
TG Level F 2
Execute
Norm..
F 3
Ref Value F 5
Return F 6
FM
On Off
F 1
AM
On Off
F 2
Volume F 4
Squelch F 5
Return F 6
Option
No F 1
Yes F 2
Return F 6
Norm Corr
On Off
F 4
SPK
On Off
F 3
Ext Ref Freq
10MHz
F 4

Start Edit F 1
Delay ms
100 X
F 2
Wait to go F 3
Do Seq... F 4
Seq.Index
6 7 8 9 10
F 2
Return F 6
Stop Edit F 5
More F 6
No F 1
Yes F 2
Return F 6
Insert F 1
Save F 2
Undelete F 5
Return F 6
Select Seq
6 7 8 9 10
F 2
Edit... F 3
Run... F 4
Delete
Seq All...
F 5
Delete F 3
Delete All.. F 4
Run Now F 2
Return F 6
No F 1
Yes F 2
Return F 6
Seq
Select Seq
1 2 3 4 5
F 1
Seq.Index
1 2 3 4 5
F 1
Run Mode
Rept. Sngl.
F 1

GSP-830 User Manual
40
Preset Contents
These are the settings that appear when pressing the Preset key
Preset
.

Frequency Center: 1.5GHz
Start: 0Hz
Stop: 3GHz
Step: 1MHz
Span 3GHz
Amplitude Ref.level: 0dBm
Unit: dBm
Scale: 10dB/
External Gain: 0dB
Input Z: 50
Autoset Amplitude Floor: Auto Span: Auto
Marker Marker: Off
Marker Table: Off
Marker Trace: Auto
All Marker: Off
Peak Search Peak Table: Off
Peak Threshold: Off
Peak Sort: Freq
Peak Track: Off
Trace Trace: A
Average: Off, 20
Mode: Clear
Detection: Normal
Meas ACPR: Off
CH SPC: 0
CH BW: 600MHz
OCBW %: 0
N dB: Off
OCBW: Off
Adj CH Offs: 0MHz
Adj CH BWs: 0MHz
Phase Jitter: Off
Limit Line H & L Limit: Off Pass/ Fail: Off
BW RBW: Auto
SwpTime: Auto
VBW: Auto
Average: Off, 20
Trigger Trigger Delay: 50ms
Trigger Mode: Normal
Trigger Freq: 1.5GHz
Display LCD Dimmer: 5
Split Window: Off
Display Line: Off
Display Title: Off
File Copy Type: Int. Trace
Rename Type: Ext. Trace
Delete Type: Int. Trace
System GPIB Add: 2
Aux Sig: Off
System Config: Off
Clock: On
Option External Ref Freq: 10MHz
TG Norm Corr: Off
Demod AM: Off
TG Output: Off
TG Ref Value: 0dBm
Demod FM: Off
Sequence Sequence: 1 Run Mode: Single
FREQUENCY/SPAN
41
FREQUENCY/SPAN
The Frequency key, together with Span key, sets the
frequency scale. Two methods are available.
Center-and-Span method defines the center point and
surrounding frequency range. Start-and-Stop method
defines the beginning and end of the frequency range.
Special span settings are available at full and zero spans.
The last span setting may also be recalled.
Frequency



Center and Span Set frequency adjustment step ............................... 42
Set center frequency............................................... 42
Set frequency span ................................................. 43
Start and Stop Set frequency adjustment Step............................... 44
Set start frequency ................................................. 44
Set stop frequency.................................................. 45
Span Display full frequency span (3GHz) ....................... 46
Display zero span (time domain) ........................... 46
Recall the Last Span Setting................................... 47
GSP-830 User Manual
42
View Signal (Center and Span)
Center-and-Span method defines the center frequency
and the left/right bandwidth (span) to locate the signal.
Set frequency adjustment step

Background Frequency adjustment step defines
the Arrow keys resolution for center,
start, and stop frequency.

Panel operation 1. Press the Frequency key.
Frequency

2. Press F4 (Step). Step
1 MHz
F 4

3. Enter the value using the
Numerical and Unit keys, Arrow
keys, and Scroll knob.
BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec
Range 0kHz to 3GHz
* Arrow keys and Scroll knob resolution: 1/10 of Span
Set center frequency

Panel operation 1. Press the Frequency key.
Frequency

2. Press F1 (Center). Center
1.5 GHz
F 1

3. Enter the value using the
Numerical and Unit keys, Arrow
keys, or Scroll knob.
BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec
Range 0kHz to 3GHz
Arrow keys and Scroll knob resolution: step value
Note Center frequency and span settings automatically change
according to start and stop frequency settings, and vice
versa.
FREQUENCY/SPAN
43
Display
Center
Frequency
reading

Set frequency span

Panel operation 1. Press the Span key.
Span

2. Press F1 (Span). Span
3 GHz
F 1

3. Enter the value using the
Numerical and Unit keys, Arrow
keys, and Scroll knob.
BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec

Range 2kHz to 3GHz
* Arrow keys & Scroll knob resolution: 1-2-5 sequence
(0 [zero span], 2kHz, 5kHz, 10kHz, 20kHz, 50kHz,
.....1GHz, 2GHz, 3GHz)
Display
Span
Span
reading

Note Center frequency and span settings automatically
change according to start and stop frequency settings,
and vice versa.
If the span becomes smaller than the CHBW (channel
bandwidth) in the ACPR or OCBW measurement
(page82), the warning Span is less than CHBW!
appears in the command window.
GSP-830 User Manual
44
View Signal (Start and Stop)
Start-and-Stop method defines the beginning (start) and
the end (stop) of the frequency range.
Set frequency adjustment Step

Background Frequency adjustment step defines
the Arrow keys resolution for
Center, Start, and Stop frequency.

Panel operation 1. Press the Frequency key.
Frequency

2. Press F4 (Step). Step
0 kHz
F 4

3. Enter the value using the
Numerical and Unit keys,
Arrow keys, and Scroll knob.
BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec
Range 0.0kHz to 3.0GHz
* Arrow keys and Scroll knob resolution: 1/10 of span
Set start frequency

Panel operation 1. Press the Frequency key.
Frequency

2. Press F2 (Start). Start
0 kHz
F 2

3. Enter the value using the
Numerical and Unit keys, Arrow
keys, and Scroll knob.
BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec

Range 0kHz to 3GHz (start frequency stop frequency)
Arrow keys and Scroll knob resolution: step value
Note Center frequency and span settings automatically change
according to start and stop frequency settings, and vice
versa.
FREQUENCY/SPAN
45
Display
Start
Frequency
Frequency
reading

Set stop frequency

Panel operation 1. Press the Frequency key.
Frequency

2. Press F3 (Stop). Stop
3 GHz
F 3

3. Enter the value using the
Numerical and Unit Keys,
Arrow keys, and Scroll knob.
BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec

Range 0.0kHz to 3.0GHz (start frequency stop frequency)
* Arrow keys and Scroll knob resolution: step value
Display
Frequency
reading
Stop
Frequency
Note Center frequency and span settings automatically change
according to start and stop frequency settings, and vice
versa.
GSP-830 User Manual
46
Full/Zero Span
Full or zero span setting sets the span to extreme values:
3GHz (full) or 0kHz (zero). They provide faster ways to
view signals in certain situations, such as in time domain
(zero span) for viewing modulation or in full span for
viewing signals with unknown frequencies.
Display full frequency span (3GHz)

Panel operation 1. Press the Span key.
Span

2. Press F2 (Full Span).
Full Span F 2

Range 3GHz (fixed)
Full span also sets these parameters to fixed values.
Center frequency: 1.5GHz
Start frequency: 0.0kHz
Stop frequency: 3.0GHz
Display
Full Span
3.0GHz
reading
Display zero span (time domain)

Panel operation 1. Press the Span key.
Span

2. Press F3 (Zero Span).
Zero Span F 3

Range Center frequency (fixed)
FREQUENCY/SPAN
47
Zero span also sets these parameters to fixed values.
Start frequency: same as the center frequency
Stop frequency: same as the center frequency
Display The diagram shows an example of observing the
amplitude modulation of the input signal.
Amplitude
modulation
0kHz Span
Start=
Center=
Stop
frequency
Note When using zero span for viewing amplitude modulation,
make sure that the RBW setting is large enough. For
RBW setting details, see page96.
Recall the Last Span Setting

Panel operation 1. Press the Span key.
Span

2. Press F4 (Last Span).
Last Span F 4

3. The span setting goes back to
the previous one.

Nesting level 1 level
GSP-830 User Manual
48
AMPLITUDE
The Amplitude key sets the vertical attribute of the
display, including the upper limit (reference level), vertical
range (amplitude scale), vertical unit, and compensation
for external gain or loss (external offset). Amplitude
correction adjusts the frequency response distortion
caused by external networks. The optional pre-amplifier
GAP-801 and GAP-802 boosts the level of a weak input
signal before it enters the GSP-830. The input
impedance can also be adjusted according to the
application needs.


Vertical Scale
Setting
Set reference amplitude......................................... 49
Select amplitude scale........................................... 50
Select amplitude unit ............................................ 50
Set external offset level ......................................... 51
Amplitude
Correction
Correct amplitude step by step.............................. 52
Delete entire correction set data ........................... 55
Recall existing correction set ................................. 55
Save/copy/delete/rename correction file............... 56
Pre-Amplifier Use Pre-Amplifier (Optional)................................. 56
Input
Impedance
Select input impedance (50/75) ...................... 57
Set impedance offset (75 only) .......................... 57
AMPLITUDE
49
Set Vertical Scale
Vertical display scale is defined by the reference
amplitude, amplitude range, measurement unit, and
external gain/loss.
Set reference amplitude
The reference level defines the amplitude at the top of the displayed range
(see below screen snapshot).

Panel operation 1. Press the Amplitude key.
Amplitude

2. Press F1 (Ref.Level). Ref.Level
-30.0dBm
F 1

3. Enter the value using the
Numerical and Unit keys, Arrow
keys, and Scroll knob.
BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec

*Arrow keys and Scroll knob resolution: vertical
scale
Range dBm 110 to +20 dBm, 0.1dB resolution
dBmV 63.01 to +66.99 dBmV, 0.01dB resolution
dBuV 3.01 to +126.99 dBuV, 0.01dB resolution
See page50 for selecting amplitude units.
Display
Reference Level Reading
Reference
level

GSP-830 User Manual
50
Select amplitude scale

Panel operation 1. Press the Amplitude key.
Amplitude

2. Press F2 (Scale dB/Div)
repeatedly to select the scale.
Scale dB/Div
10 5 2 1
F 2

Range 10, 5, 2, 1 dB/Div
Display
Scale reading

Select amplitude unit

Panel operation 1. Press the Amplitude key.
Amplitude

2. Press F3 (Units).
Units... F 3

3. Select and press the unit from
F1 (dBm), F2 (dBmV), and F3
(dBuV).
dBm F 1
dBmV F 2
dBuV F 3

4. Press F6 (Return) to go back to
the previous menu.
Return F 6

Range dBm 110 to +20 dBm
dBmV 63.01 to +26.99 dBmV
dBuV 3.01 to +126.99 dBuV
AMPLITUDE
51
Set external offset level

Background External offset compensates the amplitude gain or loss
caused by an external network or device.
Panel operation 1. Press the Amplitude key.
Amplitude

2. Press F4 (Ext.Gain). Ext.Gain
0dB
F 4

3. Enter the value using the
Numerical keys and dB or Enter
key.
BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec

Range 20.0dB to +20.0dB, 0.1dB resolution
Icon

The amplitude icon appears at the bottom of
the display when the external offset changes.
Example
Before (offset: 0dB)
Reference: -27dBm
Offset:
0dB

After (offset: 3dB)
Offset:
-3dB
Reference: -30dBm
Icon

GSP-830 User Manual
52
Amplitude Correction
Overview

Background Amplitude correction adjusts the GSP-830s frequency
response by changing amplitudes for specific frequencies.
Range Correction set 5 sets, 30 correction points each
Amplitude 40 to +40dB per correction point,
0.1dB resolution
Frequency 9kHz to 3GHz, 1kHz resolution
Icon

The amplitude icon appears at the bottom of
the display when amplitude correction is on.
Correct amplitude step by step

Example
description
In this example, the network between the GSP-830 and
DUT distorts the waveform and pushes the amplitude
down at around 2.4GHz. Amplitude correction can bring
the amplitude back to its original level.
Correction level In this example the amplitude around 2.4GHz is boosted
by +1 to +3dB as shown below.
2.2GHz +2.5dB
2.3GHz +1.3dB
2.4GHz +2.8dB
2.5GHz +2.5dB
2.6GHz +1.2dB
Waveform (before
correction)
The frequency response is distorted (non-flat) and the
level is attenuated by 2 to 3dB.

AMPLITUDE
53
1. Press the Amplitude key.
Amplitude

2. Press F5 (Corrections).
Corrections.. F 5

1. Enter correction
edit mode
3. Press F1 (Edit). The display
shows the correction sets.
Edit... F 1



2. Select correction
set
Press F1 (Select) repeatedly to
select the correction set. 5 sets, 30
points each, are selectable.
Select
1 2 3 4 5
F 1
Example: correction set 3 selected

Select
1 2 3 4 5
F 1

3a. Add correction
point
1. Make sure that the cursor is
pointing to the first empty
frequency point.
Pt . Freq. ( MHz) Gain
1
2
3
4
5

2. If necessary, move the cursor
using the Up/Down keys.

3. Enter the frequency using the
Numerical and Unit keys:
9kHz to 3GHz.
BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec

4. The cursor automatically
moves to the Gain side.
Enter the gain using the
Numerical keys and dB key
Range: 40dB to +40dB.
Pt . Freq. ( MHz) Gain
1
2
3
4
5
2200

BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec

5. Repeat the above procedure for all correction data.
The points are automatically sorted by frequency
(low high).
GSP-830 User Manual
54
3b. Modify
correction point
1. Move the cursor using the
Arrow keys.

2. Enter the new frequency or
gain using the Numerical keys
and Unit keys or dB key.
Pt . Freq. ( MHz) Gain
1
2
3
4
5
2300
2. 5
2400
2500
2600
2200
1. 3
2. 8
1. 8
1. 2

BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec

3c. Delete
correction point
1. Move the cursor to the target
using the Arrow keys.

2. Press F2 (Delete). The
frequency and gain are deleted
together.
Delete F 2

3. To undo the last deletion,
press F4 (Undelete).
Undelete F 4

Example: point 3 deleted
Pt . Freq. ( MHz) Gain
1
2
3
4
5
2300
2. 5
2400
2500
2600
2200
1. 3
2. 8
1. 8
1. 2
Pt . Freq. ( MHz) Gain
1
2
3
4
5
2300
2. 5
2500
2600
2200
1. 3
1. 8
1. 2

4. Save correction
set
1. Press F5 (Save Now). The
edited data is saved internally.
Save Now F 5

2. Press F6 (Return) to go back
to the previous menu.
Return F 6

5. Activate
correction
1. Press F2 (Correction On) to
turn on the correction.
Correction
On Off
F 2

2. The amplitude icon appears at
the bottom of the display.

After correction Frequency response becomes linear (original), and the
gain is compensated by +2 to +3dB.

AMPLITUDE
55
Delete entire correction set data

1. Press the Amplitude key.
Amplitude

2. Press F5 (Corrections).
Corrections.. F 5

Panel operation
3. Press F1 (Edit). The display
shows the correction sets.
Edit... F 1

4. Press F1 (Select) repeatedly to
select the correction set.
Select
1 2 3 4 5
F 1
5. Press F3 (Delete All).
Delete All.. F 3

6. Press F2 (Yes). The whole data
in the specified correction set
is deleted. To cancel deletion,
press F1 (No).
No F 1

Yes F 2

7. Press F6 (Return) repeatedly to
go back to previous menus.
Return F 6
Recall existing correction set

1. Press the Amplitude key.
Amplitude

2. Press F5 (Corrections).
Corrections.. F 5

Panel operation
3. Press F1 (Edit). The display
shows the correction sets.
Edit... F 1

4. Press F1 (Select) repeatedly to
select the correction set.
Select
1 2 3 4 5
F 1
5. Press F6 (Return) to go back
to the previous menu.
Return F 6

6. Press F2 (Correction On) to
activate the correction data.
Correction
On Off
F 2

GSP-830 User Manual
56
Save/copy/delete/rename correction file

Background Correction files can be saved,
copied, deleted, or renamed using
the file utilities. Press the File key to
access each function.
File

Save/Copy Press F1 (Copy). For detailed steps,
see page115.
Copy... F 1

Delete Press F2 (Delete). For detailed steps,
see page118.
Delete... F 2

Rename Press F3 (Rename). For detailed
steps, see page120.
Rename... F 3

Use Pre-Amplifier (Optional)

Background The optional pre-amplifier GAP-801 or GAP-802 boosts
weak input signals such as in EMI testing to levels that
are easy to handle, over the entire frequency range.
Range GAP-801 9kHz to 6GHz, 10dB typical
GAP-802 9kHz to 3GHz, 20dB typical
Connection 1. Connect the pre-amplifier between the input terminal
and DUT signal output.
2. Connect the pre-amplifier power input to the
GSP-830 DC 9V output.
DUT
RF I nput Power

3. The signal level becomes amplified.
Amplitude
boost

AMPLITUDE
57
Set Input Impedance
Select input impedance (50/75)

Background In most cases, the default 50 is appropriate. Use 75
when specifically required, such as in cable TV signals.
1. Press the Amplitude key.
Amplitude

2. Press F6 (More).
More F 6

Panel operation
3. Press F1 (Input Z 50/75) to
select the impedance.

4. When 75 is selected, the
amplitude icon appears at the
bottom of the display.

Set impedance offset (75 only)

Background Impedance transformation to 75 is also available
through external devices such as impedance converter
module (optional accessory ADP-101). In these cases an
external loss will be induced. Impedance offset can
compensate this effect.
1. Press the Amplitude key.
Amplitude

2. Press F6 (More).
More F 6

Panel operation
3. Make sure 75 is selected in F1
(Input Z).

4. Press F2 (Input Z Cal). Input Z Cal
5.9dB
F 2

5. Enter the offset using the
Numerical keys and dB or Enter
key.
BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec

Range 10dB to +10dB, 0.1dB resolution
GSP-830 User Manual
58
AUTOSET
The Autoset function checks input signal characteristics
and automatically searches the maximum peak signal,
then sets up the suitable horizontal and vertical scale.
The amplitude floor (which limits the search range) and
frequency observation span (which limits the viewing
range) are configurable according to the application
needs.


Overview How Autoset Works ............................................... 59
Run Run Autoset ........................................................... 60
Limit Range Limit vertical search range..................................... 61
Limit horizontal view range ................................... 61
AUTOSET
59
How Autoset Works

Description The Autoset function searches the peak signals in two
stages (full span & 0Hz - 100MHz limited span), picks up
the signal peak with the maximum amplitude, and then
shows it in the display. The following flowchart
graphically shows the simplified procedures.
Flowchart

GSP-830 User Manual
60
Run Autoset

1. Press the Autoset key.
Autoset

Panel operation
2. Press F1 (Autoset).
Autoset F 1

Search range Amplitude dBm 80 to +20dBm
dBmV 33.01to+66.99dBmV
dBuV +26.99to+126.99dBuV
Frequency 0kHz to 3.0GHz
* These ranges are applicable when both Amplitude floor
(F2) and Span limit (F3) are set to Auto.
Start frequency: 0kHz Stop frequency: 3GHz
Span: 3GHz Signal peak: 100MHz
Example: before
Autoset
Center frequency: 1.5GHz Reference level: 30dBm


Start frequency: 97.5MHz Stop frequency: 102.5MHz
Span: 5MHz Signal peak: 100MHz
Example: after
Autoset
Center frequency: 100MHz Reference level: 30dBm


AUTOSET
61
RBW/VBW/Sweep
after Autoset

All the three BW related parameters, RBW, VBW, and
Sweep, will be reset to Auto mode when using Autoset,
regardless of their previous settings.
Limit vertical search range

Background You can set the amplitude floor so that the signals lower
than the setting will be ignored by the Autoset search.
1. Press the Autoset key.
Autoset

Panel operation
2. Press F2 (Amp. Floor) to switch
the range from Auto (whole
range) to manual (limited range).
Amp.Floor
Auto Man
F 2

3. Enter the amplitude in dB using
the Numerical keys and dB or
Enter key. The Command
window shows the setting.
BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec

Amp. : - 30dBm

Range dBm 80 to +20dBm, 0.1dB resolution
dBmV 33.01 to +66.99dBmV, 0.01dB resolution
dBuV +26.99 to +126.99dBuV, 0.01dB resolution
See page50 for selecting amplitude units.
Limit horizontal view range

Background You can change the frequency span limit in the display to
get a better view of the Autoset result. By default, the
frequency span after Autoset is set at 3MHz (Auto).
1. Press the Autoset key.
Autoset

Panel operation
2. Press F3 (Span) to switch the
range between Auto (3MHz
fixed limit) to Manual.
Span
Auto Man
F 3

3. Enter the frequency using the
Numerical and Unit keys.
BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec

Span : 10MHz

Range Zero span, 2kHz to 3GHz (Manual) 3MHz fixed (Auto)
GSP-830 User Manual
62
MARKER
A Marker shows the frequency and amplitude of a
waveform point. The GSP-830 can activate up to 5
markers or marker pairs simultaneously. The marker table
helps editing and viewing multiple markers in a single
display. You can also enable/disable all markers at once.
A delta marker shows the frequency and amplitude
differences between the reference marker. The GSP-830
can automatically move a marker to various locations
including peak signal, center frequency, and start/stop
frequency. More marker operations regarding signal
peaks are also available in the Peak Search function.


Activate
Marker(s)
Activate normal marker ......................................... 63
Activate all 5 normal markers at once ................... 64
Activate delta marker............................................. 64
Move Marker(s) Move marker manually .......................................... 65
Move marker to highest peak ................................ 65
Move marker and highest peak to center............... 66
Move marker to various locations ......................... 66
Move marker to trace ............................................ 67
Marker Table Show Markers in Table........................................... 67
MARKER
63
Activate/de-activate marker

Range Normal
marker
5
Delta
marker
5 pairs
Amplitude 120 to +20dBm, 0.1dB resolution
73.01 to +66.99dBmV, 0.01dB resolution
13.01 to +126.99dBuV, 0.01dB resolution
Frequency 0kHz to 3GHz
Activate normal marker

1. Press the Marker key.
Marker

Panel operation
2. Press F1 (Marker) repeatedly
to select the marker ID from 1
to 5.
Marker
1 2 3 4 5
F 1

3. Press F2 (On) and turn On
the selected marker.
On Off F 2

4. Make sure Normal is selected
in F3. If necessary, press F3
and select it.

5. Repeat the above steps for the
number of markers required.

Display The upper right corner of the display shows the active
marker.
Marker ID, Frequency, Amplitude

GSP-830 User Manual
64
Activate all 5 normal markers at once

1. Press the Marker key.
Marker

Panel operation
2. Press F6 (More).
More F 6

3. Press F3 (All Mkrs On) to turn
On all 5 normal markers.
All Mkrs
On Off
F 3

4. To view all marker status, press
F2 (Marker Table On). The
frequency and the amplitude of
the markers appear in table list.
Marker Table
On Off
F 2

Display The marker table shows all 5 marker frequencies and
amplitudes.

Activate delta marker

1. Press the Marker key.
Marker

Panel operation
2. Press F1 (Marker) repeatedly
to select the marker ID from 1
to 5.
Marker
1 2 3 4 5
F 1

3. Press F2 (On) and turn on the
selected marker.
On Off F 2

4. Make sure Mkr is selected in
F3. If necessary, press F3 and
select Mkr.

5. Repeat the above steps for the
number of markers required.

Display The upper right corner of the display shows the active
delta marker pair.
MARKER
65
Move marker
This section assumes at least one marker is already
activated (page63). Marker frequency positions can be set
manually, or can be automatically positioned at specific
locations using the menu shortcuts.
Move marker manuall y

Panel operation 1. Check the active marker at the
top right corner of the display.
2. Move the marker using the
Left/Right keys and Scroll
knob, or directly enter the
frequency using the Numerical
and Unit keys.
BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec

Move marker to highest peak

Method 1 1. Check the active marker at the
top right corner of the display.
2. Press the Marker key.
Marker

3. Press F4 (To Peak).
To Peak F 4

Method 2 1. Alternatively, press the Peak
Search key.
Peak Search

2. Press F1 (Pk Search).
Pk Search F 1

Method 3 (marker
tracked to the peak)
1. Another method moves marker
to the peak and also tracks it.
Press the Peak Search key.
Peak Search

2. Press F6 (More).
More F 6

3. Press F4 and select Track On.
The marker is tracked to the
peak.
Track
On Off
F 4

4. The peak tracking icon appears
at the bottom of the display.

GSP-830 User Manual
66
Move marker and highest peak to center

Method 1 1. Check the active marker at the
top right corner of the display.

2. Press the Marker key.
Marker

3. Press F4 (To Peak). The marker
moves to the signal peak.
To Peak F 4


4. Press F5 (MkrCenter). The
signal peak moves to the center.
Mkr Center F 5

Method 2 1. Alternatively, press the Peak
Search key.
Peak Search


2. Press F5 (MkrCenter). The
signal peak moves to the peak,
then to the display center.
Mkr Center F 5

Move marker to various locations

Panel operation 1. Check the active marker at the
top right corner of the display.

2. Press the Marker key.
Marker

3. Press F6 (More).
More F 6

4. Press F4 (Mkr to...)
Mkr to... F 4

5. Select the destination and press
F1 (Center) to F5 (Ref Lvl).
Center: center frequency
Start: start frequency
Stop: stop frequency
CF Step: set the marker
frequency as the frequency step
value
Ref Lvl: reference amplitude
level
Mkr Center F 1
Mkr Start F 2
Mkr Stop F 3
Mkr CFStep F 4
Mkr Ref Lvl F 5

6. Press F6 (Return) to go back to
the previous menu.
Return F 6

MARKER
67
Move marker to trace

Panel operation 1. Check the active marker at the
top right corner of the display.
2. Press the Marker key.
Marker

3. Press F6 (More).
More F 6

4. Press F1 (Marker Trace). Marker Trace
Auto A B C
F 1

Range Auto The marker moves to the active signal/trace.
TraceA The marker moves to TraceA.
TraceB The marker moves to TraceB.
TraceC The marker moves to TraceC.
Show Markers in Table

Panel operation 1. Check the active marker at the
top right corner of the display.
2. Press the Marker key.
Marker

3. Press F6 (More).
More F 6

4. Press F2 (Marker Table On). Marker Table
On Off
F 2

5. The marker ID, frequency, and amplitude list
appears in the lower half of the display, updated in
real time.
Display

GSP-830 User Manual
68
PEAK SEARCH
The Peak search function automatically locates signal
peaks in various conditions, such as in next highest peak
and minimum peak. The Peak Search overlaps its feature
with the Marker function, and it is best to use the two
together. All peaks can be viewed at once using the peak
table, with configurable amplitude threshold and sorting
order.


Search Signal
Peaks
Search signal peak ................................................. 69
Search next highest peak ....................................... 70
Search highest peak and move to center ............... 70
Search minimum amplitude .................................. 71
Show Peak Table Activate peak table................................................. 71
Set peak threshold................................................. 72
Sort peak ............................................................... 72
PEAK SEARCH
69
Search Signal Peak
Peak Search puts a marker on the target signal peak. If no marker has been
activated, the GSP-830 automatically activates marker 1. The peak signal
frequency and amplitude appear at the top right corner of the display.
Marker ID, Frequency, Amplitude

Search signal peak

Method 1 1. Press the Peak Search key.
Peak Search

2. Press F1 (Pk Search).
Pk Search F 1

Method 2 1. Make sure that the marker is
already activated. If not, press
the Marker key.
Marker

2. Press F4 (To Peak).
To Peak F 4

Method 3 (marker
tracked to the peak)
1. Another method continuously
tracks the peak signal. Press the
Peak Search key.
Peak Search

2. Press F6 (More).
More F 6

3. Press F4 (Track On). The
marker is tracked to the peak
signal.
Track
On Off
F 4

4. The peak tracking icon appears
at the bottom of the display.

GSP-830 User Manual
70
Search next highest peak
The marker keeps moving to the next highest peak, in descending order.

Panel operation 1. Press the Peak Search key.
Peak Search

2. Press F2 to F4 repeatedly.
Next Peak moves the marker
to the next highest peak.
Next Pk Right moves the
marker to the next highest
peak on the right side (higher
frequency).
Next Pk Left moves the
marker to the next highest
peak on the left side (lower
frequency)
Next Peak F 2
Next Pk
Right
F 3
Next Pk
Left
F 4

Display
F2
F4 F3

Search highest peak and move to center

Method 1 1. Press the Peak Search key.
Peak Search

2. Press F1 (Pk Search).
Mkr Center F 5

Method 2 1. Make sure that the marker is
already activated. If not, press
the Marker key.
Marker

2. Press F4 (To Peak).
To Peak F 4


3. Press F5 (MkrCenter).
Mkr Center F 5

PEAK SEARCH
71
Search minimum amplitude

Panel operation 1. Press the Peak Search key.
Peak Search

2. Press F6 (More).
More F 6

3. Press F5 (Min Search). The
active marker moves to the
deepest valley in the trace.
Min Search F 5


Minimum Amplitude

Show Peak Table
Activate peak table

Panel operation 1. Press the Peak Search key.
Peak Search

2. Press F6 (More).
More F 6

3. Press F1 (Peak Table On). The
peak table appears in the lower
half of the display.
Peak Table
On Off
F 1



Range 10 peaks maximum
GSP-830 User Manual
72
Set peak threshold
Only the peaks below the threshold amplitude will be listed in the table.

Panel operation 1. Press the Peak Search key.
Peak Search

2. Press F6 (More).
More F 6

3. Press F1 (Peak Table On). Peak Table
On Off
F 1

4. Press F3 (Pk Threshold On). Pk Threshold
On Off
F 3

5. A horizontal line appears on the display. The
GSP-830 searches and lists the peaks below this
threshold amplitude.
6. Use the Arrow keys or the
Scroll knob to move the
threshold line.

Sort peak
The peaks are sorted in ascending frequency or descending amplitude order.

Panel operation 1. Press the Peak Search key.
Peak Search

2. Press F6 (More).
More F 6

3. Press F2 (Peak Sort) to switch
between frequency and
amplitude sorting.
Peak Sort
Freq Amp
F 2

Example: amplitude
sort

TRACE
73
TRACE
A Trace keeps track of waveform variants. Three traces,
A, B, and C, are available for accumulating the peak level,
freezing the current waveform shape, and averaging the
waveform. Trace math operations are available using
trace A and B.
Detection modes configure the way the GSP-830
samples the input analog signal for digitizing.


View Trace Select (activate) trace ............................................ 74
View real-time updated trace (default)................... 74
View peak-hold trace .............................................. 74
Freeze trace............................................................ 75
Hide trace .............................................................. 75
View averaged trace ............................................... 75
Move Trace Move Marker to Trace ............................................ 76
Save/copy/delete/rename trace file ....................... 77
Trace Math Run Trace Math...................................................... 78
Detection Mode Select Signal Detection Mode ................................ 80
GSP-830 User Manual
74
View traced waveform
Select (activate) trace

Panel operation 1. Press the Trace key.
Trace

2. Press F1 (Trace) repeatedly to
select the trace.
Trace
A B C
F 1
Range A (green) The default trace which is always
activated. Together with trace B, runs
trace math operation (page78).
B (amber) Together with trace A, runs trace math
operation (page78).
C (yellow)
View real-time updated trace (default)

Background The trace is updated at every sweep. The old trace is
cleared up and a new trace is drawn on the display
according to the latest measurement.
Panel operation 1. Press the Trace key.
Trace

2. Press F2 (Clear).
Clear F 2

3. The clear mode icon appears at
the bottom of the display.

View peak-hold trace

Background In the peak hold mode, the amplitude of the new trace
is compared with the last one at each sweep. Only the
higher amplitude replaces old trace points, thus holding
the highest (peak) value.
Panel operation 1. Press the Trace key.
Trace

2. Press F3 (Peak Hold).
Peak Hold F 3

TRACE
75
3. The peak hold trace icon
appears at the bottom of the
display.

Display
Peak Hold
Clear
(default)

Freeze trace

Panel operation 1. Press the Trace key.
Trace

2. Press F4 (View). The trace
shape and location becomes
fixed.
View F 4
3. The view mode (freeze) icon
appears at the bottom of the
display.

Hide trace

Panel operation 1. Press the Trace key.
Trace

2. Press F5 (Blank). The trace
disappears from the display.
Blank F 5
3. To bring back the trace again,
press F2 (Clear).
Clear F 2
View averaged trace

Panel operation
(Method1)
1. Press the Trace key.
Trace

2. Press F6 (More).
More F 6
GSP-830 User Manual
76
3. Press F1 (AVG On) to turn on
the average mode.
AVG
On Off
20
F 1

4. The average mode icon appears
at the bottom of the display.

5. Enter the average number using
the Numerical keys and Enter
key.
BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec

Panel operation
(Method2)
1. Press the BW key.
BW

2. Press F4 (AVG On) to turn on
averaging.
AVG
On Off
20
F 4

3. Enter the average time using the
numerical keys and Enter key. BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec

Range 1 to 200
Example: after
average
Averaged 20 times

Move Marker to Trace

Panel operation 1. Check the active marker at the
top right corner of the display.

2. Press the Marker key.
Marker

3. Press F6 (More).
More F 6

4. Press F1 (Marker Trace). Marker Trace
Auto A B C
F 1

Range Auto The marker moves to the active signal
or trace.
TRACE
77
TraceA The marker moves to TraceA.
TraceB The marker moves to TraceB.
TraceC The marker moves to TraceC.
Display Marker on TraceC

Save/copy/delete/rename trace file

Background Trace files can be saved, copied,
deleted, or renamed using the file
utility. Press the File key to access
each function.
File

Save/Copy Press F1 (Copy). For detailed steps,
see page115.
Copy... F 1

Delete Press F2 (Delete). For detailed steps,
see page118.
Delete... F 2

Rename Press F3 (Rename). For detailed
steps, see page120.
Rename... F 3

GSP-830 User Manual
78
Run Trace Math

Background Various mathematical operations are available using
trace A and trace B. Both traces have to be activated in
advance (page74). After the math operation, the trace
mode changes into the View mode (page75).
Panel operation 1. Press the Trace key.
Trace

2. Press F6 (More).
More F 6

3. Press F2 (Trace Math).
Trace Math.. F 2

4. Select and press the type of
math operation from F1 to F5.
AB: Swaps trace A and B.
A+BA: Adds trace A and B.
ABA: Subtracts trace B
from trace A.
A+constA: Adds a constant
value to trace A.
AconstA: Subtracts a
constant value from trace A.
A B F 1
A+B A F 2
A-B A F 3
A+const A F 4
A-const A F 5

5. When A+const / Aconst are
selected, enter the constant
value using the Numerical keys
and dB or Enter key.
Range: 40 to +40dB
BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec

6. The trace math icon appears at
the bottom of the display.

Example: AB

TRACE
79
Example: A+BA
Example: ABA
Example: A+constantA (5 dB)
Example: AconstantA (5 dB)
GSP-830 User Manual
80
Select Signal Detection Mode

Background In order to show the incoming signal on the display, the
GSP-830 first converts the input signal to a video signal,
digitizes it, then uses a detector to pick up the samples
for display. By configuring the detection mode, certain
signals can be viewed more clearly and/or sharply.
Panel operation 1. Press the Trace key.
Trace

2. Press F6 (More).
More F 6

3. Press F3 (Detection).
Detection.. F 3

4. Select the signal detection type
from F1 to F5 and press it. See
below for the description of
each type.
Normal F 1
Sample F 2
Peak+ F 3
AVG F 4
QPeak F 5

5. Press F6 (Return) to go back to
the previous menu.
Return F 6

Parameter Normal The default mode. When the signal level is
constantly increasing or decreasing, the
positive peaks are detected. Otherwise,
detecting mode switches between positive
peak and negative peaks. Useful for
picking up burst phenomenon while
avoiding excessive noise.
Sample Detects signals randomly. Useful when
detecting noise-like signals, but tends to
miss burst phenomenon.
Peak+
(positive
peak)
Detects positive peak signals. Useful for
detecting sinusoid signals, but tends to
pick up more noise than other modes.
TRACE
81
AVG
(average)
Available when the optional EMI filter is
installed. Detects the average power level
of the samples using low pass filter.
Useful for reducing the noise level. For
EMI filter details, see page146.
QPeak
(quasi-peak)
Available when the optional EMI filter is
installed. Detects the quasi-peak power
level of the samples. Useful for viewing in
zero span without missing signal
variations. For EMI filter details, see
page146.
Example Normal detection mode

Sample detection mode

Peak+ detection mode

GSP-830 User Manual
82
POWER MEASUREMENT
The Power Measurement function includes four types
of frequently used complex measurement procedures:
ACPR, OCBW, N dB, and Phase Jitter. Each item is
configurable and updated in real-time.


ACPR Overview................................................................ 83
ACPR measurement step ....................................... 83
OCBW Overview................................................................ 86
OCBW measurement step...................................... 86
N dB N dB Measurement................................................ 88
Phase Jitter Phase Jitter Measurement...................................... 89
POWER MEASUREMENT
83
ACPR Measurement
Overview

Background ACPR (Adjacent Channel Power Ratio), or ACLR
(Adjacent Channel Leakage Ratio), refers to the amount
of leakage power coming from the main radio channel
which affects adjacent channels as signal distortion.
Parameter Channel
bandwidth
The frequency bandwidth the target
channel occupies.
Range: 0kHz to Current span
Channel space The frequency distance between each
main channel.
Range: 0kHz to 3GHz
Adjacent channel
bandwidth 1 & 2
The frequency bandwidth the
adjacent channels occupy.
Range: 1kHz to 3GHz
Adjacent channel
offset 1 & 2
The frequency distance between the
adjacent channels and main channel.
Range: 1kHz to 3GHz
ACPR measurement step

1. Activate ACPR 1. Press the Measurement key.
Meas

2. Press F2 (ACPR On). ACPR
On Off
F 2

3. The display switches to ACPR mode, updating the
ACPR results in the lower half of the display.

Lower
ACPR 1
Upper
ACPR 1
Lower
ACPR 2
Upper
ACPR 2

GSP-830 User Manual
84
2. Set channel BW 1. Press F1 (Channel Setup). Channel
Setup...
F 1

2. Press F1 (CH BW).
CH BW F 1

3. Enter the channel BW using the
Numerical and Unit keys.
Range: 0kHz to Current span
BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec

4. The value is updated in the
Channel BW column in MHz.
Note: If the span (page43) becomes less than the
CHBW setting, the warning Span is less than
CHBW! appears in the command window.
If the CHBW is 0kHz, the warning CHBW is
zero! appears in the command window.
3. Set adjacent
channel1
bandwidth
1. Press F4 (ADJ CH Offset). ADJ CH
Offset...
F 4

2. Press F1 (Adj CH BW1).
Adj CH BW1 F 1

3. Enter the adjacent channel 1
bandwidth using the Numerical
and Unit keys.
Range: 1kHz to 3GHz
BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec

4. The value is updated in the Adj
CH BW1 column in MHz.
4. Set adjacent
channel1
offset
1. Press F2 (Adj CH Offs1).
Adj CH Offs1 F 2

2. Enter the adjacent channel1
offset using the Numerical and
Unit keys.
Range: 1kHz to 3GHz
BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec

3. The value is updated in the Adj
CH Offset1 column in MHz.
5. Set adjacent
channel2
bandwidth
1. Press F3 (Adj CH BW2).
Adj CH BW2 F 3

POWER MEASUREMENT
85
2. Enter the adjacent channel2
bandwidth using the Numerical
and Unit keys.
Range: 1kHz to 3GHz
BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec

3. The value is updated in the Adj
CH BW2 column in MHz.
6. Set adjacent
channel2
offset
1. Press F4 (Adj CH Offs2).
Adj CH Offs2 F 4

2. Enter the adjacent channel 2
offset using the Numerical and
Unit keys.
Range: 1kHz to 3GHz
BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec

3. The value is updated in the Adj
CH Offset2 column in MHz.

7. Set channel
space
1. Press F2 (Channel SPC).
CH SPC F 2

2. Enter the channel space using
the Numerical and Unit keys.
Range: 0kHz to 3GHz
BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec

3. The value is updated in the
Channel Space column in MHz.
8. Move channel
up/down
1. Press F6 (Return) twice.
Return F 6

x2
2. Press F4 (CH Up) or F5 (CH
Down) to switch the
measurement to the next
channel.
CH Up F 4
CH Down F 5

GSP-830 User Manual
86
OCBW Measurement
Overview

Background OCBW (OCcupied BandWidth) refers to the bandwidth
of the channel that consumes (occupies) the specified
amount of power.
Parameter Channel
bandwidth
The frequency bandwidth that the
target channel occupies.
0kHz to Current span
Channel space The frequency distance between each
main channel.
0kHz to 3GHz
OCBW % The ratio of occupied bandwidth as
the amount of power consumed.
0% to 100%, 0.1% resolution
OCBW measurement step

1. Activate OCBW 1. Press the Measurement key.
Meas

2. Press F3 (OCBW On). OCBW
On Off
F 3

3. The display switches to OCBW mode, updating the
OCBW result in the lower half of the display.

OCBW
CH
Power

2. Set channel BW 1. Press F1 (Channel Setup). Channel
Setup...
F 1

POWER MEASUREMENT
87
2. Press F1 (CH BW).
CH BW F 1

3. Enter the channel BW using the
Numerical and Unit keys.
Range: 0kHz to Current span
BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec

4. The value is updated in the
Channel BW column in MHz.
Note: If the span (page43) becomes less than the
CHBW setting, the warning Span is less than
CHBW! appears in the command window.
If the CHBW is 0kHz, the warning CHBW is
zero! appears in the command window.
4. Set OCBW % 1. Press F3 (OCBW %).
OCBW % F 3

2. Enter the OCBW % using the
Numerical keys and Enter key.
Range: 0% to 100%
BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec


3. The value is updated in the
OCBW % column.

3. Set channel space 1. Press F2 (Channel SPC).
CH SPC F 2

2. Enter the channel space using
the Numerical and Unit keys.
Range: 0kHz to 3GHz
BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec

3. Space column updates the value
in MHz.
5. Move channel
up/down
1. Press F6 (Return) twice.
Return F 6

2. Press F4 (CH Up) or F5 (CH
Down) to switch the
measurement to the next
channel.
CH Up F 4
CH Down F 5

GSP-830 User Manual
88
N dB Measurement

Background N dB refers to the frequency bandwidth of a channel
that covers the specified amplitude.
Parameter N dB 0.1dB to 80dB, 0.1dB resolution
1. Activate N dB 1. Press the Measurement key.
Meas

2. Press F6 (More).
More F 6

3. Press F1 (N dB BW On). N dB BW
On Off
F 1

4. The display switches to N dB
mode, updating N dB result in
the lower half of the display.


3dB
Bandwidth

2. Set amplitude 1. Press F2 (NdB) to set the
amplitude which the BW covers.
N dB F 2

2. Enter the amplitude using the
Numerical keys and dB or Enter
key.
Range: 0.1dB to 70dB
BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec

POWER MEASUREMENT
89
Phase Jitter Measurement

Background Phase Jitter refers to the amount of phase fluctuation
that leads to shortening or lengthening the center
frequency.
Parameter Start offset Beginning frequency offset in reference to
the center frequency.
0kHz to of span, 0.1MHz resolution
Stop offset End frequency offset in reference to the
center frequency.
0kHz to of span, 0.1MHz resolution
1. Press the Measurement key.
Meas

1. Activate Phase
Jitter
2. Press F6 (More).
More F 6

3. Press F3 (Phase Jitter On). Phase Jitter
On Off
F 3

4. The display switches to Phase jitter mode, updating
Phase jitter result in the lower half of the display.

Phase
fluctuation
Time
fluctuation

2. Set start/stop
offset
1. Press F4 (Phase Jitter Setup). Phase Jitter
Setup
F 4

2. Press F1 (Start Offset) and F2
(Stop Offset) to set the amount
of the beginning and end offset.
Start
Offset
F 1
Stop
Offset
F 2

3. Enter the offset using the
Numerical/Unit keys.
Range: 0kHz to of span
BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec

GSP-830 User Manual
90
LIMIT LINE
A Limit Line sets the upper and lower amplitude limit
over the entire frequency range. Limit lines can be used
to detect whether the input signal level is above, below,
or within the specified amplitude. The result, pass or fail,
is shown at the bottom of the display in real-time.


Edit Edit Limit Line ....................................................... 91
Pass/Fail Test Run Pass/Fail test.................................................. 94
Limit Line File Save/copy/delete/rename limit line file................. 94
LIMIT LINE
91
Edit Limit Line

Parameters Editing point Maximum 10 points for each limit line,
high or low.
Frequency 9kHz to 3GHz per editing point.
Amplitude Per editing point:
130 to +20dBm
83.01dBmV to +66.99dBmV
23.01dBuV to +126.99dBuV
1. Activate Limit
Line
1. Press the Limit Line key.
Limit Line

2. Press F1 (H Limit On) and/or
F2 (L Limit On) to activate the
high and/or low limit line.
H Limit
On Off
F 1
L Limit
On Off
F 2

3. The limit line appears on the
display.
Blue: H limit line
Yellow: L limit line


H Limit
Line
(edited)
L Limit
Line

2a Activate limit
line editing table
1. Press F3 (Edit).
Edit... F 3

2. Press F1 (Limit) to select the
limit line to be edited.
Limit
Low High
F 1

3. Press F2 (Edit Table On). The
editing table appears in the
lower half of the display.
Edit Table
On Off
F 2

GSP-830 User Manual
92


2b Deactivating
limit line table
Press F2 (Edit Table Off). The
editing table disappears and the
edited contents will be saved.
Edit Table
On Off
F 2

3a. Add a limit line
point
1. Make sure that the cursor is
pointing to the first empty
frequency point. Use the
Up/Down keys to move the
cursor, if necessary.
10 points are available for each
high and low limit line.
No. MHz dBm
1
2
3
4
5

2. If necessary, move the cursor to
different frequency points using
the Arrow keys.

3. Enter the frequency using the
Numerical and Unit keys.
Range: 9kHz to 3GHz
The value is displayed in MHz.
BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec

4. The cursor automatically moves
to the dBm side. Enter the gain
in using the Numerical keys and
dB or Enter key.
Range: 130dBm to +20dBm
No. MHz dBm
1
2
3
4
5
98
5. Continue the above steps for
the number of points required.

3b. Delete a limit
line point
1. Move the cursor using the
Arrow keys.

2. Press F3 (Delete) to delete the
point (frequency and amplitude
together).
Delete F 3

LIMIT LINE
93
No. MHz dBm
1
2
3
4
5
100
- 40
102
98
- 30
- 40
No. MHz dBm
1
2
3
4
5
- 40
102
98
- 40
3. To undo deletion, press F5
(Undelete).
Undelete F 5

3c. Delete the whole
limit line data
1. Press F4 (Delete All).
Delete All.. F 4

2. Press F1 (No) or F2 (Yes) to
confirm deletion. All 10 limit
line points will be deleted at
once.
No F 1
Yes F 2

3. Press F6 (Return) to go back to
the previous menu.
Return F 6

4. To undo deletion, press F5
(Undelete).
Undelete F 5

4. Switch
upper/lower
limit line
If necessary, press F1 (Limit) to
start editing the other limit line.
Repeat the above steps.
Limit
Low High
F 1

Example High Limit Line
Point No. Frequency (MHz) Amplitude (dBm)
1 98MHz 40dBm
2 100MHz 30dBm
3 102MHz 40dBm
Resulted line

GSP-830 User Manual
94
Run Pass/Fail test
This section assumes that the limit line is already defined.

Pass/Fail condition

Checks whether the entire waveform
amplitude stays between the high limit
and low limit lines.


Checks whether the peak waveform
amplitude stays between the high and
low limit lines.


Checks whether the waveform valleys
stay between the high and low limit
lines.
1. Select condition 1. Press the Limit Line key.
Limit Line

2. Press F5 (Pass/Fail)
repeatedly to select the
condition.
Pass/Fail
F 5
2. Run Pass/Fail test 1. Press F4 (Pass/Fail On) to
activate the test.
Pass/Fail
On Off
F 4

2. The test result appears at the
bottom of the display.
Note If the limit lines are not defined, the Pass/Fail test uses
the highest or lowest display level as the limit line.
Save/copy/delete/rename limit line file

Background Limit line files can be saved, copied,
deleted, or renamed using the file
utility. Press the File key to access
each function.
File

Save/Copy Press F1 (Copy). For detailed steps,
see page115.
Copy... F 1

Delete Press F2 (Delete). For detailed steps,
see page118.
Delete... F 2

Rename Press F3 (Rename). For detailed
steps, see page120.
Rename... F 3

BANDWIDTH
95
BANDWIDTH
The BW (BandWidth) feature configures how narrow
the GSP-830 can sort out different signal peaks
(resolution), and how fast the display can be updated
(sweep time). Averaging the waveform is also available
for smoothing noise level. The resolution, sweep time,
and averaging are in a trade-off relationship, so
configuration should be done with care.
BW


RBW/VBW Select RBW (Resolution BandWidth)...................... 96
Select VBW (Video BandWidth) ............................. 98
RBW/VBW Auto Mode Contents ............................ 99
Sweep Time Set Sweep time..................................................... 101
Average Average Waveform................................................ 101
Reset Reset RBW/VBW/sweep time to auto................... 102
GSP-830 User Manual
96
Select RBW (Resolution BandWidth)

Background RBW (Resolution Bandwidth) defines the width of the
IF (intermediate frequency) filter that is used to separate
signal peaks from one another. The narrower the RBW,
the greater the capability to separate signals at close
frequencies. But it also makes the sweep time longer
under specific frequency span (the display is updated
less frequently). See page99 for suitable RBW selection.
Panel operation 1. Press the BW key.
BW

2. Press F1 (RBW) to select Auto
or Manual.
RBW
Auto Man
F 1

3. When Man (manual) is selected,
use the Arrow keys or Scroll
knob to select the RBW. The
selected RBW appears in the
command window.

RBW: 30kHz
Mode Auto RBW is automatically selected. See
page99 for the setting.
Manual

RBW is manually selected. The BW icon
appears at the bottom of the display.
Range See page99 for RBW reference setting according to the
frequency span.
RBW Recommended span Standard/ Optional
300Hz Span<30kHz Optional (300Hz
RBW)
3kHz Span<300kHz Standard
9kHz 300kHzSpan<600kHz Optional (EMI
Filter - page146)
10kHz 300kHzSpan<1MHz Optional (10k/
100kHz RBW)
30kHz 300kHzSpan<6MHz Standard
BANDWIDTH
97
100kHz 6MHzSpan<20MHz Optional
(10k/100kHz
RBW)
120kHz 6MHzSpan<19MHz Optional (EMI
Filter page146)
300kHz 6MHzSpan<60MHz Standard
4MHz 60MHzSpan Standard
Check RBW
installation status
1. Press the System key.
System

2. Press F6 (More).
More... F 6

3. Press F4 (System Config On) to
show the system configuration
in the display.
System Config
On Off
F 4

Optional
Items

4. Check the optional items
corner and see the RBW
installation status (checkmark
installed, blank not
installed)
Installed



Not installed



5. Press F4 (System Config Off)
to close the system
configuration.
System Config
On Off
F 4

Note 9k/120kHz RBW (EMI Filter) and 10k/100kHz RBW
are exclusive; cannot be installed together. For installing
a new optional RBW, contact the service center.
GSP-830 User Manual
98
Select VBW (Video BandWidth)

Background VBW (Video Bandwidth) defines the smoothness of the
trace on the display. Combined with RBW, VBW defines
the ability to sort out target signal from surrounding
noise or adjacent peaks.
See page99 for suitable VBW selection.
Panel operation 1. Press the BW key.
BW

2. Press F2 (VBW) to select Auto
or Manual.
VBW
Auto Man
F 2

3. When Man (manual) is selected,
use the Arrow keys or Scroll
knob to select the VBW. The
selected VBW appears in the
command window.

VBW: 1kHz

Mode Auto VBW is automatically selected. See
page99 for setting.
Manual

VBW is manually selected. The VBW
icon appears at the bottom of the
display.
Range 10Hz to 1MHz in 1-3 steps
In Auto mode, VBW is automatically selected in
combination with RBW. See page99 for the settings. Use
the Auto mode settings for reference when manually
selecting the VBW.
Note The GSP-830 automatically changes the VBW
according to RBW selection.
BANDWIDTH
99
RBW/VBW Auto Mode Contents

Background The following applies when selecting Auto mode for
RBW and VBW setting. Use them as a reference when
manually selecting RBW and VBW.
The RBW/VBW range differs according to system
configuration, especially the optional items.
Check the RBW
installation status
1. Press the System key.
System

2. Press F6 (More).
More... F 6

3. Press F4 (System Config On) to
turn on the system
configuration window.
System Config
On Off
F 4

Optional
Items
4. Press F4 (System Config Off) to
close the system configuration.
System Config
On Off
F 4
Optional item Install Icon Standard
configuration
EMI Filter(9k/120k RBW) No

300Hz RBW No

10k/100kHz RBW No


Span
RBW
VBW
3k
10k
30k 4M
10k 300k
300k 6M 60M 3G 0
300k
100k
(Logarithmic scale, unit in Hz)
GSP-830 User Manual
100

Optional item Install Icon
EMI Filter (9k/120k RBW) Yes

Standard +
9k/120kHz RBW
configuration
300Hz RBW No

10kHz/100kHz RBW No


30k 3k
10k
9k 4M
10k 300k
300k 600k 6M 60M 3G 0 19M
120k 300k
10k 30k 100k
(Logarithmic scale, unit in Hz)
Span
RBW
VBW

Optional item Install Icon
EMI Filter (9k/120k RBW) Yes

Standard +
300/9k/120kHz
RBW configuration
300Hz RBW Yes

10kHz/100kHz RBW No


30k 300
3k
3k 9k 4M
10k 10k 300k
300k 600k 6M 60M 0 19M
120k 300k
10k 30k 100k
(Logarithmic scale, unit in Hz)
3G 30k
Span
RBW
VBW

Optional item Install Icon
EMI Filter (9k/120k RBW) No

Standard +
10k/100kHz RBW
configuration
300Hz RBW No

10kHz/100kHz RBW Yes


30k 3k
10k
10k 4M
10k 300k
300k 1M 6M 60M 0 20M
100k 300k
10k 30k 100k
(Logarithmic scale, unit in Hz)
3G
Span
RBW
VBW

Optional item Install Icon
EMI Filter (9k/120k RBW) No

Standard +
300/10k/100kHz
RBW configuration
300Hz RBW Yes

10kHz/100kHz RBW Yes


30k
30k 300
3k
10k 4M
10k 300k
300k 1M 6M 60M 0 20M
100k 300k
10k 30k 100k
(Logarithmic scale, unit in Hz)
3G
3k
10k
Span
RBW
VBW

BANDWIDTH
101
Set Sweep time

Background Sweep time defines the display update rate. Note that
sweep time and RBW/VBW are in trade-off. Faster
sweep time updates display more frequently but makes
RBW and VBW wider, reducing the capability to
separate signals at close frequencies.
Panel operation 1. Press the BW key.
BW

2. Press F3 (Swp tm) To switch
between Auto and Manual
setting.
Swp Tm
Auto Man
F 3



In the Manual mode, the manual sweep time
icon appears.
3. When Manual mode is selected,
enter the sweep time using the
Numerical/Unit keys.
BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec

Mode Auto Sweep time is automatically set.
Manual Sweep time is manually set.
Range 50ms to 25.6s, 1us resolution
Note When in the Auto mode, GSP830 is optimized for fast
sweep time. For narrower RBW settings, like 300 Hz or
3 KHz, this optimization will cause slightly higher phase
noise. To reduce the phase noise level, slow down the
sweep time using manual setting.
Average Waveform

Background The GSP-830 averages the waveform for a user-defined
or system-defined number before it is displayed. This
feature smoothes the noise level to a great extent, but
slows down the display update rate.
Panel operation
(Method1)
1. Press the BW key.
BW

GSP-830 User Manual
102
2. Press F4 (AVG On) to turn on
averaging. The current average
number setting appears in the
command window.
AVG
On Off
20
F 4

AVG : 20

3. The trace average icon appears
at the bottom of the display.

4. Enter the average time using the
Numerical keys and Enter key. BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec

Panel operation
(Method2)
1. Press the Trace key.
Trace

2. Press F6 (More).
More F 6

3. Press F1 (AVG On) to turn on
the average mode. The current
average number setting appears
in the command window.
AVG
On Off
20
F 1

AVG : 20

4. The average mode icon appears
at the bottom of the display.

5. Enter the average number using
the numerical keys followed by
the Enter key.
BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec

Parameter 2 to 200 (Available only when Average is on)
AVG number after
power on/preset
After powering up the GSP-830 (page20) or presetting it
(page40), the average number is reset to 20 (AVG itself
is turned off)
Reset RBW/VBW/sweep time to auto

Panel operation 1. Press the BW key.
BW

2. Press F5 (All Auto). The RBW,
VBW, and sweep time setting all
change to Auto.
All Auto F 5

RBW/VBW/Sweep
Setting after
Autoset
When using the Autoset, all three BW related
parameters, RBW, VBW, and sweep, will be reset to
Auto mode, regardless of their previous settings.
TRIGGER
103
TRIGGER
The Trigger function sets the signal conditions upon
which the GSP-830 triggers capturing waveforms,
including frequency, amplitude, and delay. An external
trigger signal, instead of the default internal signal, may
be used as required for special conditions.
Trigger


Free Run Select free run (default) ....................................... 104
Video Trigger Activate video trigger ........................................... 104
External Trigger Activate external trigger ....................................... 104
Trigger Mode Select Trigger Mode ............................................. 105
Trigger Delay Set Trigger Delay .................................................. 106
GSP-830 User Manual
104
Select Trigger Type
Select free run (default)
In the free run mode, the GSP-830 captures all incoming signals (no
triggering condition).

Panel operation 1. Press the Trigger key.
Trigger

2. Press F1 (Free Run).
Free Run F 1

Activate video trigger

Panel operation 1. Press the Trigger key.
Trigger

2. Press F2 (Trigger Condition
Video).
Trigger
Condition
Video Ext.
F 2

3. The video trigger icon appears
at the bottom of the display.

4. Enter the trigger level
(amplitude) using the Numerical
keys and dB or Enter key. The
value appears in the command
window.
BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec

Video: - 20dBm
5. Press F5 (Trigger Freq) to set
the frequency at which the
GSP-830 checks the trigger
condition.
Default value: center frequency
Trigger Freq
1.5GHz
F 5

6. Enter the trigger frequency
using the Numerical/Unit keys.
BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec

Deactivate video
trigger
To de-activate video triggering,
press F1 (Free Run).
Free Run F 1

Level range (Ref.Level 80dBm) to Ref.Level
(Example: when the reference level is 30dBm, the
trigger range will be 110dBm to 30dBm)
Frequency range 0 to 3GHz
TRIGGER
105
Activate external trigger

Panel operation 1. Press the Trigger key.
Trigger

2. Press F2 (Trigger Condition
Ext.).
Trigger
Condition
Video Ext.
F 2

3. The Ext. trigger icon appears at
the bottom of the display.

4. Connect the external trigger
signal to the rear panel terminal.
EXT. TRIG.
INPUT

Input level range 0V to 5V, positive edge trigger
Select Trigger Mode

Panel operation 1. Press the Trigger key.
Trigger

2. Press F3 (Trigger Mode)
repeatedly to select the trigger
mode.
Trigger Mode
Norm. Sgl. Cont.
F 3
3. Press F6 (Run Now) to
manually start triggering.
Run Now F 6

Modes Normal The GSP-830 captures signals every time
the triggering condition occurs.
Single The GSP-830 captures signals when the
first triggering condition occurs, then
stops capturing altogether.
Continuous The GSP-830 captures signals when the
first triggering condition occurs, then
switches to Free Run mode. After then,
input signals are captured continuously
regardless of their conditions.
GSP-830 User Manual
106
Set Trigger Delay

Background Trigger delay sets the amount of time between the
moment of trigger condition and when the GSP-830
starts capturing signal.
Panel operation 1. Press the Trigger key.
Trigger

2. Press F4 (Trigger Delay). Trigger Delay
1000ms
F 4

3. Enter the delay time using the
Numerical/Unit keys. BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec

Delay range 10us to 100s, 1us resolution
DISPLAY
107
DISPLAY
The Display setting configures the LCD screen dimmer
level, display line, display title, and split window. Display
line provides a convenient reference line for measuring
amplitude. Split window allows two simultaneous
waveforms to be shown on the display. The VGA
connector on the rear panel outputs the LCD screen
contents in 640x480 resolution.
Display


LCD Dimmer Change Display Brightness .................................. 108
Display Line Activate Display Line............................................ 108
Title Enter Display Title................................................ 109
Split Window Use Split Display.................................................. 110
VGA Output Use VGA Output .................................................. 111
Save Save Display Image to USB Flash Drive ............... 111
GSP-830 User Manual
108
Change Display Brightness

Panel operation 1. Press the Display key.
Display

2. Press F1 (LCD Dimmer).
LCD Dimmer F 1

3. Change the brightness using the
Left/Right keys or Scroll knob.

Range 0 (darkest) to 5 (brightest)
Activate Display Line

Panel operation 1. Press the Display key.
Display

2. Press F2 (Display Line On). Display Line
On Off
F 2

3. The display line appears on the
display and its level appears in
the command window.
Display Line: - 50dB

Display line

4. Move the line using the
Left/Right keys or Scroll knob.

Note Display line is NOT available in the following situations.
Split window (page110)
Limit Line editing (page91)
Power measurements (page82)

DISPLAY
109
Enter Display Title

Panel operation 1. Press the Display key.
Display

2. Press F3 (Title).
Title... F 3

3. Select the character from F2
to F4 and press it. (When
entering numbers 0 to 9, press
one from F2 to F4 anyway)
(Capital
Letter)
F 2
(Small
Letter)
F 3
(Symbol) F 4

4. Here is how to type in the
capital letter S. Press F2
(Capital Letter) repeatedly
until the cursor reaches S.
(Capital
Letter)
F 2
Q R S T U

5. Press the Enter key. S appears
in the command window.

TL S
To enter the number 2,
press the number 2 key.
To delete (undo) previously
entered character, press the
BK SP key.

6. Continue the above until all
the characters are entered.
TL SATEST
(SATEST)
7. Press F5 (Show Title).
Show Title F 5

8. The entered title appears at
the top left corner of the
display.

9. To erase the title, press F1
(Clear Title).
Clear Title F 1

Parameter Capital letter Upper case alphabet, A to Z.
Small letter Lower case alphabet, a to z.
Number 0 to 9.
GSP-830 User Manual
110
Symbol Commonly used 14 symbols as shown
below.

\

# / _ -
. * : & (
) < > %
Use Split Display

Panel operation 1. Press the Display key.
Display

2. Press F4 (Split Window). Split
Window...
F 4

3. The display splits into upper and lower screen. The
lower display retains the original vertical and
horizontal scale. The upper display shows full scale.


4. Select the active display (in
which the waveform is updated)
by pressing F1 (Upper) or F2
(Lower). Pressing F3 (Alternate
Sweep) updates both displays
alternately.
Upper F 1
Lower F 2
Alternate
Sweep
F 3

5. To go back to the original single
display, press F4 (Full Screen).
The currently active window is
expanded.
Full Screen F 4

Note Switching to the Full Screen from the Alternate Sweep
mode is not recommended, since it is not predictable
which display, upper or lower, will be selected.
DISPLAY
111
Use VGA Output

Panel operation Connect an external monitor to
rear panel VGA output terminal.
The display output is always on.

Parameter Connector type VGA 15pin, female
Resolution 640 x 480
Save Display Image to USB Flash Drive

Panel operation 1. Connect the USB flash drive to
the front panel USB terminal.
The USB icon appears at the
bottom of the display.

Compatibility USB 1.1/2.0
Connector TypeA host, female
Note

If it takes more than 2 seconds for the
USB icon to appear, disconnect the
USB flash drive and connect again.
2. Press the File key.
File

3. Press F4 (Print Screen).
Print Screen.. F 4

4. Press F1 (To Ext. Memory). To Ext.
Memory...
F 1

5. The USB flash drive contents
appear in the display.


MyResult A
MyFolderB
File Funct ion: Print t o File
I t em Name
Memory Ext ernal
Remark
MyFolderA
2007/ 06/ 06 10: 29
2007/ 01/ 12 14: 45
Dat e
2007/ 03/ 06 09: 48
GSP-830 User Manual
112
6. To enter into an existing folder,
move the cursor to the folder
and press the Enter key.

7. To save the display image, move
the cursor to the blank area
using the Up/Down keys and
press F2 (Print Now). A new
bitmap file (MyBMapx.bmp) is
created in the USB flash drive.

Print Now F 2


MyResult A
MyFolderB
File Funct ion: Print t o File
I t em Name
Memory Ext ernal
Remark
MyFolderA
MyBMap0
2007/ 06/ 06 10: 29
2007/ 01/ 12 14: 45
Dat e
2007/ 03/ 06 09: 48


Note
If the cursor is pointing to an existing
file, the file will be overwritten.
8. A confirmation message
appears in the command
window. To accept saving, press
the Enter key. To cancel saving,
press the BK SP key.
ENTER for Yes: BKSP for No:



9. The file is saved when the date information appears.
Now it is safe to remove the USB drive from the
GSP-830.

MyResult A
MyFolderB
File Funct ion: Print t o File
I t em Name
Memory Ext ernal
Remark
MyFolderA
MyBMap0
2007/ 06/ 06 10: 29
2007/ 01/ 12 14: 45
Dat e
2007/ 03/ 06 09: 48
2007/ 07/ 10 15: 30

FILE
113
FILE
The File function manages file operations; copy, delete,
and name change. The file format and contents include
trace waveform, limit line, amplitude correction,
sequence set (user defined macro), and panel settings.
The file source and destination are selectable between
internal (inside the GSP-830) and external (inside the
USB flash drive). The File function can also save display
images to USB flash drives.


File Operation File Location and File Type................................... 114
Copy ................................................................... 115
Delete File............................................................ 118
Rename File ......................................................... 120
Save Display Image to USB Flash Drive ............... 121
GSP-830 User Manual
114
File Location and File Type

File location Internal The GSP-830 internal memory. The
number of files and their names are
fixed (see below).
External The USB flash drive connected to the
front panel connector. There is no
practical limit on the number of files.

The USB icon turns on when the
flash drive is detected.
Compatibility: USB 1.1/2.0
Connector: TypeA host

Note
If it takes more than 2 seconds for the
USB icon to appear, disconnect the USB
flash drive and connect again.
File type Trace Trace waveform data. For details, see
page73.
File format: *.tra
13 files are available internally:
TraceA/B/C (current trace),
Trace 1to10 (stored trace).
Limit Limit Line data. For details, see page90.
File format: *.lmt
12 files are available internally:
LimitHL (current high limit line),
LimitHL1 to 5 (stored high limit line),
LimitLL (current low limit line),
LimitLL1 to 5 (stored low limit line).
Correction Amplitude correction data. For details,
see page52.
File format: *.cor
5 files are available: Correction 1 to 5.
Seq. Sequence data. For details, see page136.
File format: *.seq
10 files are available: Sequence 1 to 10.
FILE
115
Setup Panel setup data. For details, see
page125.
File format: *.set
10 files are available: Setup 1 to 10.
Copy File

1. Connect USB
flash drive (for
external file)
When using the USB flash drive
(external file) for source or
destination, connect the drive to the
front panel connector.


The USB icon turns on when the flash drive is
detected.
2. Select source file 1. Press the File key.
File

2. Press F1 (Copy). The file copy
window appears.
Copy... F 1

Source
File Funct ion: Copy
I t em Name
Type: Memory
Remark Dat e
3. Press F1 (Source).
Source.. F 1

4. Select the file type from F1 to
F5, press it, and then select Int
(internal) or Ext (external).
The display gets updated
accordingly. The below example
shows the internal trace files.
Trace
Int. Ext.
F 1
Limit
Int. Ext.
F 2
Correction
Int. Ext.
F 3
Seq.
Int. Ext.
F 4
Setup
Int. Ext.
F 5


TraceC
TraceB
Source
File Funct ion: Copy
I t em Name
Type: Trace Memory I nt ernal
Remark
TraceA
Dat e
GSP-830 User Manual
116
5. Use the Up/Down keys to
move the cursor to the source
file location. (Example: Internal
TraceC selected)


TraceC
TraceB
Source
File Funct ion: Copy
I t em Name
Type: Trace Memory I nt ernal
Remark
TraceA
Dat e

6. Press F6 (Return). The copy
source file information is
retained.
Return F 6

3. Select
destination file
1. Press F2 (Destination). The
destination file copy window
becomes active in the lower half
of the display.
Destination.. F 2

2. Select the file type from F1 to
F5, press it, and select Internal
or external. The file type must
be the same as the source type.
The display updates accordingly.
Trace
Int. Ext.
F 1


TraceC
TraceB
Source
File Funct ion: Copy
I t em Name
Type: Trace Memory I nt ernal
Remark
TraceA
TraceC
TraceB
Dest inat ion
File Funct ion: Copy
I t em Name
Type: Trace Memory I nt ernal
TraceA
Trace1 Empt y
Trace2 Empt y
Trace3 Empt y
Trace1
Trace2
Trace3
Dat e
Remark
Empt y
Empt y
Empt y
Dat e
Trace4 Empt y
Trace4 Empt y

3. Use the Up/Down keys to
move the cursor to the copy
destination file location.
(Example: internal Trace1
selected)

FILE
117

TraceC
TraceB
Dest inat ion
File Funct ion: Copy
I t em Name
Type: Trace Memory I nt ernal
TraceA
Trace1
Remark
Empt y
Dat e
When selecting an external location, select a blank
space or an existing folder (a new file will be created
inside).

MyBMap0
MyFolderB
File Funct ion: Copy
I t em Name
Memory Ext ernal
Remark
MyFolderA
2007/ 06/ 06 10: 29
2007/ 01/ 12 14: 45
Dat e
2007/ 03/ 06 09: 48
Dest inat ion
Type: Trace
4. Press F6 (Return). The copy
destination file information is
retained.
Return F 6

4. Edit file name
(when creating
new file)
1. (Skip this step when overwriting
an existing file or copying to a
folder) To edit the newly
created file name, press F3 (Edit
File Name On).
F 1
Edit File Name
On Off

Note: You cannot change the names of files in the
internal memory.
2. Move the cursor inside the
character table using the
Left/Right keys or Scroll knob.
Press the Enter key to confirm
each character and the BK SP
key to delete one character.




Char Table
ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ a b c d e f
g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3. When completed, press F3
(Edit File Name Off) to turn it
off.
F 1
Edit File Name
On Off
5. Copy file 1. Press F4 (Copy Now).
Copy Now F 4

GSP-830 User Manual
118
2. A confirmation message
appears in the command
window. To accept the file, press
the Enter key. To cancel the file,
press the BK SP key.
ENTER for Yes: BKSP for No:



3. When the file copy is done, the
destination file attribute changes
from Empty to Full and/or the
date becomes updated.


TraceC
TraceB
Dest inat ion
File Funct ion: Copy
I t em Name
Type: Trace Memory I nt ernal
TraceA
Trace1
Remark
Full
Dat e
2007/ 07/ 09 10: 41

Note If the source file does not
contain data, a warning message
appears. In this case, re-select a
source file with actual data.
Select ed File I s Empt y!

Delete File

1. Connect USB
flash drive (for
external file)
When using the USB flash drive
(external file) for source or
destination, connect the drive to the
front panel connector.



The USB icon turns on when the flash drive is
detected.
2. Select source file 1. Press the File key.
File

2. Press F2 (Delete).
Delete... F 2

3. Press F1 (Type). The file
deletion window appears.
Type... F 1


File Funct ion: Delet e
I t em Name
Type: Memory
Remark Dat e

FILE
119
4. Select the file type by pressing
F1 to F5, then select Int
(internal) or Ext (external).
The display gets updated
accordingly. The example below
shows the internal Trace files.
Trace
Int. Ext.
F 1
Limit
Int. Ext.
F 2
Correction
Int. Ext.
F 3
Seq.
Int. Ext.
F 4
Setup
Int. Ext.
F 5

5. Use the Up/Down keys to
move the cursor to the file
location. (Example: internal
Trace1 selected)


File Funct ion: Delet e
I t em Name
Type: Memory I nt ernal
Remark
Trace1 Full
Dat e
2007/ 07/ 09 10: 41
Trace2 Empt y
6. Press F6 (Return). The file
location is retained.
Return F 6

3. Delete file 1. Press F2 (Delete Now).
Delete Now F 2

2. A confirmation message
appears in the command
window. To accept deletion,
press the Enter key. To cancel
deletion, press the BK SP key.
ENTER for Yes: BKSP for No:


3. Internal file: The file attribute
(Remark) changes from Full to
Empty.
External file: The file itself is
deleted.


File Funct ion: Delet e
I t em Name
Type: Memory I nt ernal
Remark
Trace1 Empt y
Dat e
Trace2 Empt y
GSP-830 User Manual
120
Rename File
File rename is allowed only for external (USB flash drive) files.

1. Connect USB
flash drive
Connect the USB flash drive to the
front panel connector.



The USB icon turns on when the flash drive is
detected.
2. Select file 1. Press the File key.
File

2. Press F3 (Rename). The USB
flash drive contents and the
character table appear in the
display.
Rename... F 3

3. Point the cursor to the file using
the Up/Down keys.

3. Edit file name 1. Press F1 (Edit File Name) and
turn it on.
F 1
Edit File Name
On Off

2. Move the cursor inside the
character table using the
Left/Right keys or Scroll knob.
Press the Enter key to confirm
each character.



Char Table
ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ a b c d e f
g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

3. When completed, press F1
(Edit File Name Off) to turn it
off.
F 1
Edit File Name
On Off

4. Press F2 (Confirm). A
confirmation message appears
in the command window.
Confirm F 2

ENTER for Yes: BKSP for No:

5. To accept renaming and save
the new file name, press the
Enter key. To cancel renaming,
press the BK SP key.


FILE
121
Save Display Image to USB Flash Drive

1. Connect USB
flash drive
Connect the USB flash drive to the
front panel USB connector. The
USB icon appears at the bottom of
the display.

Compatibility USB 1.1/2.0
Connector TypeA host

Note
If it takes more than 2 seconds for the
USB icon to appear, disconnect the
USB flash drive and connect again.
2. Enter menu 1. Press the File key.
File

2. Press F4 (Print Screen).
Print Screen.. F 4

3. Press F1 (To Ext. Memory). To Ext.
Memory...
F 1

4. The USB flash drive contents
appear in the display.


MyResult A
MyFolderB
File Funct ion: Print t o File
I t em Name
Memory Ext ernal
Remark
MyFolderA
2007/ 06/ 06 10: 29
2007/ 01/ 12 14: 45
Dat e
2007/ 03/ 06 09: 48
3. Selecting file Move the cursor to the blank area
using the Up/Down keys.


MyResult A
MyFolderB
File Funct ion: Print t o File
I t em Name
Memory Ext ernal
Remark
MyFolderA
MyBMap0
2007/ 06/ 06 10: 29
2007/ 01/ 12 14: 45
Dat e
2007/ 03/ 06 09: 48
To enter into an existing folder,
move the cursor to the folder
and press the Enter key.


Note
If the cursor is pointing to an existing
file, the file will be overwritten.
GSP-830 User Manual
122
4. Edit file name
(when creating
new file)
1. (Skip this step when overwriting
an existing file) To edit the
newly created file name, press
F1 (Edit File Name On).
F 1
Edit File Name
On Off

2. Move the cursor inside the
character table using the
Left/Right keys or Scroll knob.
Press the Enter key to confirm
each character and the BK SP
key to delete one character.




Char Table
ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ a b c d e f
g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

3. When completed, press F1
(Edit File Name Off) to turn it
off.
F 1
Edit File Name
On Off

5. Save file 1. Press F2 (Print Now) and press
F2 (Print Now).
Print Now F 2

2. A confirmation message
appears in the command
window. To accept the file, press
the Enter key. To cancel the file,
press the BK SP key.
ENTER for Yes: BKSP for No:



3. The file is saved when the date information appears.
Now it is safe to remove the USB drive from the
GSP-830.

MyResult A
MyFolderB
File Funct ion: Print t o File
I t em Name
Memory Ext ernal
Remark
MyFolderA
MyBMap0
2007/ 06/ 06 10: 29
2007/ 01/ 12 14: 45
Dat e
2007/ 03/ 06 09: 48
2007/ 07/ 10 15: 30

PRESET
123
PRESET

Pressing the Preset key returns the GSP-830 to the
factory default parameters as defined below.
Frequency Center: 1.5GHz
Start: 0Hz
Stop: 3GHz
Step: 1MHz
Span 3GHz
Amplitude Ref.level: 0dBm
Unit: dBm
Scale: 10dB/
External Gain: 0dB
Input Z: 50
Autoset Amplitude Floor: Auto Span: Auto
Marker Marker: Off
Marker Table: Off
Marker Trace: Auto
All Marker: Off
Peak Search Peak Table: Off
Peak Threshold: Off
Peak Sort: Freq
Peak Track: Off
Trace Trace: A
Average: Off, 20
Mode: Clear
Detection: Normal
Meas ACPR, OCBW: Off
CH SPC: 0
CH BW: 600MHz
OCBW %: 0
N dB, Phase Jitter: Off
Adj CH Offs: 0MHz
Adj CH BW: 0MHz
Limit Line H & L Limit: Off Pass/ Fail: Off
BW RBW, VBW, Swptime: Auto Average: Off, 20
Trigger Trigger Delay: 50ms
Trigger Mode: Normal
Trigger Freq: 1.5GHz
Display LCD Dimmer: 5
Split Window: Off
Display Line: Off
Display Title: Off
File Copy Type: Int. Trace Delete Type: Int. Trace
System GPIB Add: 2
Aux Sig: Off
System Config: Off
Clock: On
Option External Ref Freq: 10MHz
TG Norm Corr: Off
Demod AM: Off
TG Output: Off
TG Ref Value: 0dBm
Demod FM: Off
Sequence Sequence: 1 Run Mode: Single
GSP-830 User Manual
124
SYSTEM
The System key configures and displays the system
settings, including self-test result, date/time setting, and
synchronization with other devices. The panel settings
can be saved to GSP-830 internal memories or external
USB flash drive, the latter permitting transferring panel
settings among multiple GSP-830.


Panel Setting Save/Recall Panel Setting .................................... 125
Copy/delete/rename setup ................................ 125
Interface
Configuration
USB slave port configuration............................... 126
RS-232C configuration......................................... 126
GPIB configuration (optional) ............................. 127
System
Information
View system error ................................................ 128
View system configuration................................... 129
View self-test result ............................................. 131
Date/Time Set Date/Time ..................................................... 132
Synchronization GSP-830 as master (internal reference signal) .... 133
GSP-830 as slave (external reference signal) ....... 134
Language Select Language................................................... 135
Auxiliary Signal Use Auxiliary Signal ............................................. 135
Service Menu Enter Service Operation....................................... 135
SYSTEM
125
Save/Recall Panel Setting

Panel operation 1. Press the System key.
System

2. Press F1 (Save/Recall Setup). Save/Recall
Setup..
F 1

3. Press F1 or F2 repeatedly to
select the setting file.
Setup
6 7 8 9 10
F 2
Setup
1 2 3 4 5
F 1
4. Press F3 (Save Now) or F4
(Recall Now) to save or recall
the setting file.
Save Now F 3
Recall Now F 4

File contents Setting file contains the following information.
Reference amplitude level
Amplitude unit, scale
Start/stop frequencies
Center and span frequencies
VBW, RBW, and sweep time
Tracking Generator level
Tracking Generator normalization data
Copy/delete/rename setup file

Background Setting files can be copied, deleted,
or renamed using the file utility.
Press the File key to access each
function.
File

Copy Press F1 (Copy). For detailed step,
see page115.
Copy... F 1

Delete Press F2 (Delete). For detailed step,
see page118.
Delete... F 2

Rename Press F3 (Rename). For detailed
step, see page120.
Rename... F 3

GSP-830 User Manual
126
Configure Communication Interface

Background The GSP-830 supports three types of communication
interface: standard USB/RS-232C and optional GPIB.
Communication
Method
PC software
(page150)
USB slave, RS-232C
Remote control
(page157)
USB slave, RS-232C, GPIB
Interface type USB slave USB 1.1 or 2.0, TypeB mini
RS-232C D-sub 9 pin.
GPIB (optional) IEEE-488 24pin.
USB slave port
configuration
No need for panel configuration:
Just connect a type B mini USB
cable between the rear panel and
PC.

RS-232C
configuration
1. The RS-232C configuration can
be viewed from the system
menu. Press the System key.
System

2. Press F3 (Serial Port).
Serial Port.. F 3

3. The RS-232C port
configuration appears.
Configure the PC according to
this setting.
Baud: 57600
Parity: None
Stop bit: 1
Data bit: 8
Stop
1
F 3
Baud
57600
F 1
Parity
None
F 2
Data
8
F 4

SYSTEM
127
4. Connect a 9-pin male RS-232C
cable to the rear panel
connector.

GPIB
configuration
(optional)
The GPIB interface is a factory installed optional item.
Contact service personnel for a new installation.
1. Press the System key.
System

2. Press F2 (GPIB Add). GPIB Add
8
F 2

3. Select GPIB address using the
Left/Right keys, Scroll knob, or
Numerical keys. Configure the
PC according to this setting.

BK SP
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec

4. Connect GPIB cable to the rear
panel terminal.

Check GPIB installation status
1. To check the GPIB installation
status, press the System key.
System

2. Press F6 (More).
More... F 6

3. Press F4 (System Config On). System Config
On Off
F 4

4. The system configuration
appears. When the GPIB
module is installed correctly, the
check box is marked.
Installed

Uninstalled


Check GPIB sel f-test resul t
1. To check the internal GPIB
functionality result, press the
System key.
System

2. Press F6 (More).
More... F 6

GSP-830 User Manual
128
3. Press F2 (Self Test).
Self Test... F 2

4. The GPIB result appears at F1.
If the result is Fail (underlined),
contact service personnel.
GPIB
Pass Fail
F 1


GPIB constraints
Keep these rules when using the GPIB interface.
Altogether less than 15 devices & 20m cable length,
2m between each device on the bus
Unique address assigned to each device
At least 2/3 of the GPIB devices turned on
No loop or parallel structure allowed
View System Information
View system error

Panel operation View the bottom of the screen, the error message area.
If there is a system error, the message appears in red.
Cent er : 1. 5GHz (EXT Unlock)
EXT
Unlock


Amp
Uncal

Inappropriate RBW or VBW is selected.
Frequency is less than 15MHz and
amplitude is less than 30dBm.

EXT
Unlock

External reference input is not working
properly.

LO1
Unlock

Local oscillator 1 is not working properly.

LO3
Unlock

Local oscillator 3 is not working properly.

Med
Unlock

1ppm stability signal is not working
properly. Appears only when the optional
1ppm Stability Module is installed.

Ref
Unlock

Internal reference signal is not working
properly.
SYSTEM
129
View system configuration

Panel operation 1. To check system
configuration, press the
System key.
System

2. Press F6 (More).
More... F 6

3. Press F4 (System Config On). System Config
On Off
F 4

4. The system configuration appears. Four types of
information are listed.
Serial number
Software/hardware/firmware/language version
Installed optional items
Reference signal selection status

Serial Number
Software/
Hardware Version
Optional Item
Installation Status
Reference Signal
Status
Language Version

5. To close the configuration,
press F4 again (System
Config Off).
System Config
On Off
F 4

Serial number The serial number for device
identification. This number is
necessary for various service level
operations. The same number is
pasted on the rear panel.
Software/hardware
language version
Shows versions and release date of hardware, software,
firmware, and language database. Used for service level
operations.
GSP-830 User Manual
130

Optional item
installation status
Shows which optional item is currently installed.
: installed, : uninstalled.
Sign Description


Battery pack / DC input module
(page148)
GPIB interface (page127)


Demodulator (page144)
Internal reference signal with middle
range stability ( 1ppm stability module
- page174).
300Hz RBW (page96)


9k/120kHz RBW(page96) included in
the EMI Filter(page146)
10k/100kHz RBW (page96)
Reference signal
status
Checked radio button shows the reference signal used.
For reference signal usage, see page133.
: enabled, : disabled.
Sign Description



Internal reference signal, standard
stability



Internal reference signal, medium
stability. Available when the 1ppm
stability module (page174) is installed.



Internal reference signal, high stability
(reserved for future use).


External reference signal.
SYSTEM
131
View self-test result

Background The GSP-830 runs a series of internal tests upon
power-up. If any of the test result shows Fail, contact
the service center.
Panel operation 1. Press the System key.
System

2. Press F6 (More).
More... F 6

3. Press F2 (Self Test).
Self Test... F 2

4. The result appears in F1 to F4.
(The GPIB result appears only
when the module is installed)
GPIB
Pass Fail
F 1
Flash
Pass Fail
F 2
SDRAM
Pass Fail
F 3
RTC
Pass Fail
F 4

5. Press F6 (Return) to go back to
the previous menu.
Return F 6

Item GPIB The optional GPIB interface connection.
Available only when the GPIB module is
installed (page129).
Flash Internal Flash memory area for storing
the system code and data.
SDRAM Internal SDRAM area on which the code
runs.
RTC The real-time clock that controls the date
and time settings (page132).
GSP-830 User Manual
132
Set Date/Time

1. The clock display is activated by
default.


Activate clock
display (if
necessary)
1. Press the System key.
System

2. Press F6 (More).
More... F 6

3. Press F1 (System Clock). System
Clock...
F 1

4. Press F3 (Clock On). The clock
appears at the bottom right side
of the display.
Clock
On Off
F 3

2. Set date 1. Press F1 (Date).
Date... F 1

2. Press F1 (Year) to F4 (Day of
Week). Enter the value using the
Numerical keys and Enter key.
BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec

The clock display changes
accordingly.
Year F 1
Month F 2
Day F 3
Day of Week F 4

Year 2000 to 2099
Month 1 to 12 (translated to Jan to Dec)
Day 1 to 31 (depends on the month)
Day of Week 1(Mon) to 7(Sun)
3. Set time 1. Press F2 (Time).
Time... F 2

SYSTEM
133
2. Press F1 (Year) to F3 (Second).
Enter the value using the
Numerical keys and Enter key.
BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec

The clock display changes
accordingly.
Hour F 1
Minute F 2
Second F 3

Hour 0 to 23
Minute 0 to 59
Second 0 to 59
Synchronize GSP-830 with Other Devices
Using the REF INPUT/OUTPUT on the rear panel, the GSP-830 can
synchronize its internal frequency with other devices. The GSP-830 can
become the master (reference signal for another device) or the slave (reference
signal input from another device).
GSP-830 as master (internal reference signal)

Panel operation Connect the reference signal output
terminal on the rear panel to the
other devices reference input.

Signal type Output level 10MHz, 5V TTL signal (assumes
the load impedance is infinite)
Output impedance 50
Stability check 1. Press the System key.
System

2. Press F6 (More).
More... F 6

3. Press F4 (System Config On). System Config
On Off
F 4

The system configuration window appears. The Internal
Reference Signal sign shows the status.
: enabled, : disabled.
Internal reference signal, standard stability
GSP-830 User Manual
134


Internal reference signal, median stability.
Available when the 1ppm stability module
(page174) is installed. The MED icon
appears at the bottom of the display.
Internal reference signal, high stability
(reserved for future use).
GSP-830 as slave (external reference signal)

Panel operation 1. Press the Option key.
Option

2. Press F4 (Ext Ref Freq) to
enable external reference signal.
Ext Ref Freq
10MHz
F 4

3. Use the Left/Right keys or
Scroll knob to select the
external reference frequency.

4. Connect the external reference
signal to the input terminal on
the rear panel.

5. The external reference signal
icon appears at the bottom of
the display.

Signal type TTL signal
Frequency 10 preset frequencies are available (units in MHz).
1.0 1.544 2.048 5.0 10.0
10.24 13.0 15.36 15.4 19.2
Status check 1. Press the System key.
System

2. Press F6 (More).
More... F 6

3. Press F4 (System Config On). System Config
On Off
F 4

The system configuration window appears. The
External Reference Signal sign shows the
status: - enabled, - disabled.
SYSTEM
135
Select Language

Panel operation 1. Press the System key.
System

2. Press F6 (More).
More... F 6

3. Press F5 (Language).
Language F 5

4. Press F1 repeatedly to select
the menu language.
(English) F 1

Language type
English Simplified Chinese Other selections
(The language selection depends on the regions)
Use Auxiliary Signal
The auxiliary signal is a general purpose signal useful for functionality check.

Panel operation 1. Press the System key.
System

2. Press F4 (Aux Sig On). The
auxiliary signal appears in the
display.
Aux Sig
On Off
F 4

Specification 100MHz, 30dBm
Enter Service Operation
The following functions are intended only for service personnel.

Optional items
maintenance
1. Press the System key.
System

2. Press F5 (Service). To continue,
a password is needed.
Service... F 5

RF diagnosis 1. Press the System key.
System

2. Press F6 (More).
More... F 6

3. Press F3 (RF Diagno). To
continue, a password is needed.
RF Diagno... F 3

GSP-830 User Manual
136
SEQUENCE
The Sequence function records and plays back
user-defined macros (measurement steps). 10 sequences
are available in repeat or single running mode, each with
maximum 20 steps including all panel operations. Delay
and pause features permit observing measurement results
during the sequence.


Edit 1. Select sequence ............................................... 137
2. Start editing..................................................... 137
3. Stop editing ..................................................... 140
4. Save the edited sequence ................................ 140
Delete all sequence.............................................. 140
Run 1. Select sequence ............................................... 140
2. Select running mode........................................ 141
3. Run sequence .................................................. 141
Sequence File Save/copy/delete/rename sequence file .............. 141
SEQUENCE
137
Edit Sequence

1. Select
sequence
1. Press the Sequence key. The
display enters into the
sequence edit mode.
Seq

2. Press F1 (sequence 1 to 5) or
F2 (sequence 6 to 10)
repeatedly to select the
sequence ID.
Select Seq
6 7 8 9 10
F 2
Select Seq
1 2 3 4 5
F 1

2. Start editing 1. Press F3 (Edit).
Edit... F 3

2. Press F1 (Start Edit).
Start Edit F 1

3. The Start Edit sign in the
mid-right of the display turns
green.
St art Edit
2a. Add step 20 steps are available for each sequence. Every key
operation can be recorded as a step.
Press the Enter key each time to confirm step entering.
(In some cases this is not necessary: check if the item
appears in the window).
Example: Activate system auxiliary
signal
1. Press the System key.
2. Press F4 (Aux Sig On).
3. Press the Enter key.
System

Aux Sig
On Off
F 4


Example: Run Autoset
1. Press the Autoset key.
2. Press F1 (Autoset).
3. Press the Enter key.
Autoset

Autoset F 1


The result looks like this.
Aux Sig On
Aut oset
GSP-830 User Manual
138
2b. Add delay The delay function inserts a waiting period between
steps. The basic unit of delay time is 100ms.
1. Press F2 (Delay ms). Delay ms
100 X
F 2

2. Enter the delay time using the
Numerical keys and Enter key.
For example, pressing 5 +
Enter inserts 500ms (5 *
100ms) and pressing 100 +
Enter inserts 10s (100 *
100ms = 10,000ms = 10s).
BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec

Range 100ms to 10s, 100ms resolution
2c. Pause
sequence
Stops executing the sequence until the F1 (Continue) is
pressed. Useful for observing the result of particular
action (for example ACPR measurement).
1. Press F3 (Wait to go).
Wait to go F 3

2. When the sequence is
running, F1 (Continue) menu
appears on the menu. Press it
to break the pause and
continue the sequence.
Continue F 1

Inserts a whole sequence set. 2d. Insert another
sequence
1. Press F4 (Do Seq).
Do Seq... F 4

2. Press F1 (sequence 1 to 5) or
F2 (sequence 6 to 10)
repeatedly to select the
inserted sequence.
Select Seq
1 2 3 4 5
F 1
Select Seq
6 7 8 9 10
F 2

Note: The currently edited sequence cannot be inserted.
2e Insert blank
space
1. Press F6 (More).
More F 6

2. Use the Up/Down keys to
move the cursor to the
insertion point.

3. Press F1 (Insert). A blank
space will be created.
Insert F 1

SEQUENCE
139
Aux Sig On
Aut oset
Delay ms 5s
NdB BW On
NdB 5

Aux Sig On
Aut oset
Delay ms 5s
NdB BW On
NdB 5
4. Press F6 (Return) to go back
to the previous menu.
Return F 6

2f. Delete step 1. Press F6 (More).
More F 6

2. Use the Up/Down keys to
move the cursor to the
deletion point.

3. Press F3 (Delete). The step
will be deleted.
Delete F 3

Aux Sig On
Aut oset
Delay ms 5s
NdB BW On
NdB 5

Aux Sig On
Delay ms 5s
NdB BW On
NdB 5

4. To undo deletion, press F5
(Undelete).
Undelete F 5

5. To go back to the previous
menu, press F6 (Return).
Return F 6

1. Press F6 (More).
More F 6

2g. Delete all
steps in a
sequence
2. Press F4 (Delete All).
Delete All.. F 4

3. Press F2 (Yes) to confirm, or
F1 (No) to cancel. All steps
will be deleted.
No F 1
Yes F 2

Aux Sig On
Aut oset
Delay ms 5s
NdB BW On
NdB 5

4. To undo deletion, press F5
(Undelete).
Undelete F 5

GSP-830 User Manual
140
5. Press F6 (Return) to go back
to the previous menu.
Return F 6

3. Stop editing 1. Press F5 (Stop Edit).
Stop Edit F 5

2. The Start Edit sign in the
display mid-right turns off.
St art Edit
4. Save the edited
sequence
1. Press F6 (More).
More F 6

2. Press F2 (Save). The sequence
is saved.
Save F 2

3. Press F6 (Return) to go back
to the previous menu.
Return F 6

Delete all sequences

Panel operation 1. Press the Sequence key.
Seq

2. Press F5 (Delete Seq All). Delete
Seq All...
F 5

3. Press F2 (Yes) to confirm, or
F1 (No) to cancel. All 10
sequences will be deleted.
No F 1
Yes F 2

4. To go back to the previous
menu, press F6 (Return).
Return F 6

Note Delete Seq All cannot be recovered the Undelete
function is not applicable.
Run Sequence
This section assumes that editing the sequence is completed.

1. Select
sequence
1. Press the Sequence key
Seq

2. Press F1 (sequence 1 to 5) or
F2 (sequence 6 to 10)
repeatedly to select the
sequence.
Select Seq
1 2 3 4 5
F 1
Select Seq
6 7 8 9 10
F 2

SEQUENCE
141
2. Select running
mode
1. Press F4 (Run).
Run... F 4

2. Press F1 (Run Mode) to select
the running mode, repeat
(Rept) or single (Sngl).
Run Mode
Rept Sngl
F 1

Repeat Repeats running a sequence until F6 (Stop)
is pressed. Note: F6 (Stop) menu appears
only when the sequence is running.
Single Runs the sequence once.
3. Run sequence 1. Press F2 (Run Now).
Run Now F 2

2. If the sequence editing has
not yet finished, a warning
message appears. In such case,
stop (finish) the editing
process first (page140).
St op Edit First !

3. The sequence icon appears at
the bottom of the display.

4. To stop running, press F6
(Stop). In the single mode, the
sequence automatically stops
when all steps are completed.
Stop F 6

Save/copy/delete/rename sequence file

Background Sequence files can be saved, copied,
deleted, or renamed using the file
utility. Press the File key to access
each function.
File

Save/Copy Press F1 (Copy). For detailed steps,
see page115.
Copy... F 1

Delete Press F2 (Delete). For detailed steps,
see page118.
Delete... F 2

Rename Press F3 (Rename). For detailed
steps, see page120.
Rename... F 3

GSP-830 User Manual
142
TRACKING GENERATOR
The optional Tracking Generator (Opt.01) is a factory
installed item which generates a sweep signal with its
sweep time and frequency range matching the GSP-830
system. The amplitude is maintained to a constant value
over the entire frequency range, which is very useful for
testing the frequency response of the DUT.



Activate tracking generator

1. Activate TG
output
1. Press the Option key.
Option

2. Press F1 (TG).
TG... F 1

3. Press F1 (TG On). TG
On Off
F 1

4. The tracking generator output
becomes activated.
RF INPUT 50
+30dBm MAX
MAX DC 25V

2. Set TG output
level
1. Press F2 (TG Level).
TG Level F 2

2. Change the TG output level
using the Numerical keys and
Enter key.
BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec

Range 0 to 50dBm
Normalize tracking generator

1. Set reference
level
1. Press the Option key.
Option

TRACKING GENERATOR
143
2. Press F1 (TG).
TG... F 1
3. Press F5 (Ref Value).
Ref Value F 5
4. Set the reference value using the
Numerical keys and Enter key. BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec

Normalization amplitude is set at Reference level
regardless of the TG output level.
Range 130dBm to +20dBm
2. Run
normalization
1. Press F3 (Execute
Normalization).
Execute
Normalization..
F 3
2. Press F2 (Yes) to confirm
running Normalization. Press
F1 (No) to cancel running.
No F 1
Yes F 2
3. Press F6 (Return) to go back to
the previous menu.
Return F 6
3. Activate
normalization
1. To activate normalization, press
F4 (Norm Corr On).
Norm Corr
On Off
F 3
2. Normalization is activated and
the TG icon appears.

Check TG installation status

Panel operation 1. Press the System key.
System

2. Press F6 (More).
More... F 6
3. Press F4 (System Config On).
The configuration appears.
System Config
On Off
F 4
4. The TG sign shows the
installation status, installed
(checked) or not installed
(unchecked).
Installed

Not installed

GSP-830 User Manual
144
DEMODULATOR
The optional FM/AM Demodulator (Opt.07) is a
factory installed item which recovers AM or FM
modulated baseband signal. The demodulated signal can
be output from the rear panel 3.5mm mini-phone jack.



Activate demodulation

Panel operation 1. Press the Option key.
Option

2. Press F2 (Demod).
Demod... F 2

3. Select Frequency Modulation
or Amplitude Modulation by
pressing F1 (FM On) or F2
(AM On).
FM
On Off
F 1
AM
On Off
F 2

Activate phone output

Panel operation 1. Press F2 (Demod).
Demod... F 2

2. Press F3 (SPK On). The rear
panel phone output becomes
active.
SPK
On Off
F 3

Specification 3.5mm stereo headphone jack wired for mono
Maximum 0.5W output into 8 load
Frequency range: 30Hz to 50kHz
Note Either FM or AM must be turned on before activating
the phone output.
DEMODULATOR
145
Set phone output volume

Panel operation 1. Press F2 (Demod).
Demod... F 2
2. Press F4 (Volume).
Volume F 4
3. The volume level appears in the
command window.
VOLUME: 30
4. Change the output volume using the
Numerical keys, Arrow keys, or
Scroll knob followed by the Enter
key.
BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec

Volume level 0 to 63
Cut off phone output noise (squelch)

Panel operation 1. Press F2 (Demod).
Demod... F 2
2. Press F5 (Squelch).
Squelch level: 0 to 4
Squelch F 5
3. The squelch level appears in the
command window. Output level
lower than the setting is muted.
SQUELCH
4. Change the squelch level using the
Numerical keys, Arrow keys, or
Scroll knob followed by the Enter
key.
BK SP
dB
Enter
GHz /
Sec
mSec
MHz /
kHz /
Sec

Check Demodulator installation status

Panel operation 1. Press the System key.
System

2. Press F6 (More).
More... F 6
3. Press F4 (System Config On).
The configuration appears.
System Config
On Off
F 4
4. The Demodulator sign shows
the installation status, installed
(checked) or not installed
(unchecked).
Installed

Not installed

GSP-830 User Manual
146
EMI FILTER
The optional EMI filter (Opt. 05, also called
9kHz/120kHz RBW) is a factory installed optional item
used for specific measurement situations such as EMI
average detection, where a higher level of sensitivity is
required than the standard configuration. When this
module is installed, the GSP-830 acquires two additional
features: Average/Quasi-peak detection mode, and
9k/120k RBW.
Select average/ quasi peak signal detection mode

Panel operation 1. Press the Trace key.
Trace

2. Press F6 (More).
More F 6

3. Press F3 (Detection).
Detection.. F 3

4. The signal detection mode
appears. When the EMI filter is
installed, F4 (AVG) and F5
(QPeak) becomes available.
For signal detection mode
details, see page80.
Normal F 1
Sample F 2
Peak+ F 3
AVG F 4
QPeak F 5

Parameter AVG (average) Detects the average power level of the
samples using a low pass filter. Useful
for smoothing the noise level.
QPeak
(quasi-peak)
Detects the quasi-peak power level of
the samples. Useful for viewing in zero
span without missing signal variations.
EMI FILTER
147
Select 9kHz/120kHz RBW

Panel operation 1. Press the BW key.
BW

2. Press F1 (RBW Man). RBW
Auto Man
F 1
3. Select 9kHz/120kHz RBW
using the Arrow keys or Scroll
knob. The RBW value appears
in the command window.

RBW: 9kHz
Note In the automatic mode, RBW is selected according to the
internal reference setting.
For reference RBW/VBW setting, see page99.
Check EMI filter installation status

Panel operation 1. Press the System key.
System

2. Press F6 (More).
More... F 6
3. Press F4 (System Config On).
The system configuration
window appears.
System Config
On Off
F 4
4. The 9/120k RBW sign shows
the installation status, installed
(checked) or not installed
(unchecked).
Installed

Not installed

Note EMI filter (9k/120k RBW) and 10k/100k RBW are
exclusive. These two optional items cannot be installed
together.
GSP-830 User Manual
148
BATTERY / DC
OPERATION
The Battery Pack (Opt.02) is an optional item
permitting portable field operation of the GSP-830 using
internal battery. The DC Input permits using an
automobile 12V power, also useful for field operation.


Battery Operation

Turn Off the main power
switch and remove the power
cord before inserting or
removing the battery pack.

Package removal /
insertion

Turn the knob to open the battery compartment.

Check Battery level 1. Press the Option key.
Option

BATTERY / DC OPERATION
149
2. Press F3 (Battery). The level
icon appears at the bottom of
the display.
Battery F 3


Fully charged

50% to 25%


75% to 50%

Less than 25%
Note Regardless of battery check, the GSP-830
shows the icon for 5 seconds every 30 minutes.
Battery
maintenance
To prolong the battery life, take out the batteries when
they are not in use for more than one month.
Parameter Usage time 3 hours (typical)
Charge time 3 hours (typical)
Check battery installation status

Panel operation 1. Press the System key.
System

2. Press F6 (More).
More... F 6
3. Press F4 (System Config On).
The configuration appears.
System Config
On Off
F 4
4. The Battery sign shows the
installation status, installed
(checked) or not installed
(unchecked).
Installed

Not installed

DC Operation

Panel operation Connect the DC power cable to the
rear panel input connector.
Specification 12V, 40W max, 2.1mm plug

Battery charging When the DC power is in use, the batteries are also
charged.
Note DC power cable (with a lighter plug for automobile
usage) is available as an optional item, GTL-401
(page174).
GSP-830 User Manual
150
PC SOFTWARE
The proprietary PC software (Eagleshot) for remote
operation is downloadable from Good Will Instruments
website (www.gwinstek.com.tw). The Eagleshot software
permits waveform viewing and major panel operations
using the familiar PC interface: large monitor, keyboard,
and mouse.


Installation PC requirement .................................................... 151
Software download .............................................. 151
Installation step................................................... 151
Invocation Configure interface .............................................. 152
Invoke software.................................................... 152
Usage Establish connection............................................ 154
Capture waveform................................................ 154
Clear waveform.................................................... 154
Save waveform..................................................... 155
Printout screen image.......................................... 155
Use marker .......................................................... 155
Exit program........................................................ 156
PC SOFTWARE
151
Install Software
PC requirement

Software OS Windows 2000/XP
Hardware USB 1 USB host connector, 1.1 or 2.0 compatible
Software download

1. Website access Access http://www.gwinstek.com.tw/.
2. Download Go to the GSP-830 corner and download the software.
Installation step

1. Activate setup
software
1. Unpack the zip file.
2. Double click Setup.exe.
3. The setup screen opens. Close all other applications
and click OK. To cancel, click Exit Setup.


2. Start installation 1. To install the software into a
specific directory, click the
Change Directory button.
2. Click the icon to start
installation.

3. When the installation is successful, a message
appears. Click OK to complete the installation.


GSP-830 User Manual
152
Connect Software
This section assumes that the software is already installed.
Configure interface
USB slave or RS-232C is acceptable.

Configure USB No need to configure anything on
the GSP-830 side. Just connect the
type B mini USB cable to the rear
panel.

Configure RS-232C 1. The RS-232C configuration can
be checked from the system
menu. Press the System key.
System

2. Press F3 (Serial Port).
Serial Port.. F 3

3. The RS-232C port configuration
appears. Configure the PC
according to this setting.
Baud: 57600
Parity: None
Stop bit: 1
Data bit: 8
Stop
1
F 3
Baud
57600
F 1
Parity
None
F 2
Data
8
F 4

4. Connect a 9 pin, male RS-232C
cable to the rear panel connector.

Invoke software

PC operation
1. Invoke the software from the startup menu in the PC.



PC SOFTWARE
153
2. Click the setting icon. The
parameter setting window appears.




3. Select the connection port (COM port).

To check the configuration in the PC, go to Control
panel System properties Device Manager.
5. Click the Setting icon again to close
the setting window

6. Click the Open COM Port icon. The
connection is established when the
other icons become active.



Functionality check Click the Capture icon. Make sure the
waveform shown in the GSP-830 display
is captured correctly.


GSP-830 User Manual
154
Use Software
Establish connection

Operation step 1. Press the setting icon and open
the parameter setting window.

2. Select the serial port terminal.

3. Press the COM port icon. The
connection is established when
the other icons become active.

Port setting Select the port specified in the PC
configuration. To check the configuration
in the PC, go to Control panel
System properties Hardware tab
Device Manager.
Capture waveform

Operation step Click the capture icon. The current
waveform is captured and appears on
the screen.

Display

Clear waveform

Operation step Click the clear trace icon. The
waveform is cleared from the screen.

PC SOFTWARE
155
Save waveform

Operation step 1. Press the setting icon. Select the file
format from *.jpg/*.bmp (screen
snapshot), *.txt (measurement data).




2. Press the save icon. The standard save
dialogue window opens. Select the
directory and save the file.

File format The *.txt file contains the following information.
Frequency (MHz) and Amplitude for all waveforms
Amplitude reference level, unit, and scale
Start, Stop, Center frequency, and frequency span
RBW, VBW, and sweep time
Date and time (if already configured)
Printout screen image

Operation step Click the print icon. The standard printout
dialogue opens. Select the printer and
printout the screen image.

Note The screen image contrast will be reversed (background
color becomes white).
Use marker

Operation step 1. Click the marker icon. The
marker function window
appears.


2. Select Live or Storage.
GSP-830 User Manual
156
3. Check the marker ID box. 5
markers, 0 to 4, are available.

4. Enter the frequency to each
marker in MHz.

5. Select normal (N) or delta
marker. Example:
Marker 0 & Delta 1: the delta
marker shows the difference
between marker0 and marker1.
6. The display is updated with markers in red color. The
marker values are listed at the bottom of the display.

Exit program

Operation step Click the exit icon or press Alt key + F4.

REMOTE CONTROL
157
REMOTE CONTROL
The GSP-830 supports remote control which is partially
based on IEEE 488.2 and SCPI (Standard Commands
for Programmable Instrumentation) standards. The
command set covers most of the panel operations. Three
interfaces are available: USB slave, RS-232, and GPIB.
Interface Configure Interface .............................................. 158
Command Syntax Command Syntax ................................................. 160
Command Set IEEE488.2 standard commands ........................... 161
Frequency ............................................................ 161
Span .................................................................... 161
Amplitude............................................................ 162
Autoset ................................................................ 162
Marker & Peak Search ......................................... 163
Trace .................................................................... 164
Power measurement ............................................ 165
Limit line ............................................................. 166
BW....................................................................... 167
Trigger ................................................................. 167
Display................................................................. 168
File ...................................................................... 168
Preset .................................................................. 169
System................................................................. 169
Option ................................................................. 170
Sequence ............................................................. 170
GSP-830 User Manual
158
Configure Interface

Interface type USB slave USB 1.1 or 2.0, type B mini
RS-232C D-sub 9 pin
GPIB (optional) 24 pin
No need for panel configuration:
Just connect a type B mini USB
cable to the rear panel.
USB slave port
configuration

The USB icon turns on when
the connection is detected.

RS-232C
configuration
1. The RS-232C configuration can
be checked from the system
menu. Press the System key.
System

2. Press F3 (Serial Port).
Serial Port.. F 3

3. The RS-232C port
configuration appears.
Configure the PC according to
this setting.
Baud: 57600
Parity: None
Stop bit: 1
Data bit: 8
Stop
1
F 3
Baud
57600
F 1
Parity
None
F 2
Data
8
F 4

4. Connect a 9-pin male RS-232C
cable to the rear panel terminal.

GPIB (optional)
configuration
GPIB interface is a factory installed optional item.
Contact the service center for a new installation.
1. Press the System key.
System

2. Press F2 (GPIB Add). GPIB Add
8
F 2

REMOTE CONTROL
159
3. Select the GPIB address using
the Left/Right keys or Scroll
knob. Configure the PC
accordingly.

4. Connect the GPIB cable to the
rear panel terminal.
Check GPIB
installation status
1. To check the GPIB installation
status, press the System key.
System

2. Press F6 (More).
More... F 6

3. Press F4 (System Config On).
The configuration appears.
System Config
On Off
F 4

4. The system configuration
window appears. GPIB sign
shows installed (checked) or not
installed (unchecked)
Installed

Not installed

Check GPIB self-test
result
1. To check the internal GPIB
functionality test result, press
the System key.
System

2. Press F6 (More).
More... F 6

3. Press F2 (Self Test).
Self Test... F 2

4. The GPIB result appears at F1.
If the result is Fail (underlined),
contact the service center.
GPIB
Pass Fail
F 1

GPIB constraints Keep these rules when using the GPIB interface.
Altogether less than 15 devices & 20m cable length,
2m between each device on the bus
Unique address assigned for each device
At least 2/3 of the GPIB devices turned On
No loop or parallel structure allowed
Functionality Check Run this query command from the terminal.
*idn?
This should return the Manufacturer, Model number,
Serial number, and Firmware version.
GW, GSP-830, P920130, V3.01
GSP-830 User Manual
160
Command Syntax
The commands are partially compatible with IEEE488.2 (1992) and SCPI
(Standard Commands for Programmable Instrumentation) (1994) standards.
Commands are NON-case sensitive.

Example command
meas: freq: cen _ 9 _ khz
1 2 3 4 5

1: Command Header 2: Single space
3: Parameter1 4: Single space
5: Parameter2
Command Header Several command header elements (nodes) can be
concatenated to form a complex command.
The above example can be separated into:
meas: (root node) + freq: + cen:
0/1 0 or 1. Parameter example
1to4 Integer between 1, 2, 3, or 4.
0.01to5 Decimal number between 0.01 and 5.
khz Unit (non-case sensitive)
Message
Terminator
Marks the end of a command line. Any of the following
is acceptable.
CR^END Line feed code (hexadecimal 0D) with
END message
CR Line feed code
<dab>^END Last data byte with END message
Message Separator ; (semicolon) Command separator.
REMOTE CONTROL
161
Command Set
Commands are non-case sensitive.
Underline means a single space (100_mhz100 mhz).
IEEE488.2 standard commands

*cls Clear Status Command
*ese? Standard Event Status Enable Command
*ese Standard Event Status Enable Query
*esr? Standard Event Status Register Query
*idn? Identification Query. Parameter: Manufacturer, Model, Serial
number, Firmware version. Example: GW, GSP-830, P920130,V3.01
*opc? Operation Complete Command
*opc Operation Complete Query
*rst Reset Command
*sre? Service Request Enable Command
*sre Service Request Enable Query
*stb? Read Status Byte Query
*tst? Self-Test Query
*wai Wait-to-Continue Command
Frequency

meas:freq:cen? Returns the center frequency in kHz. Example: 1000000 khz
meas:freq:cen Sets the center frequency. Example: meas:freq:cen_100_mhz
meas:freq:st? Returns the start frequency in kHz. Example: 1000000 khz
meas:freq:st Sets the start frequency. Example: meas:freq:st_100_mhz
meas:freq:stp? Returns the stop frequency in kHz. Example: 1000000 khz
meas:freq:stp Sets the stop frequency. Example: meas:freq:stp_100_mhz
meas:freq:ss? Returns the frequency step size in kHz. Example: 1000000 khz
meas:freq:ss Sets the frequency step. Example: meas:freq:ss_100_mhz
meas:freq:cen:fw Moves the center frequency one step size forward.
meas:freq:cen:bw Moves the center frequency one step size backward.
Span

meas:span? Returns the frequency span in kHz. Example: 10000 khz
meas:span Sets the frequency span. Example: meas:span_10_mhz
meas:span:full Sets the frequency span to full.
meas:span:zero Sets the frequency span to zero.
meas:span:last Recalls the last frequency span setting.
GSP-830 User Manual
162
Amplitude

meas:refl:unit? Returns the reference level unit.
Parameter: 1 (dBm), 2 (dBmV), 3 (dBuV)
meas:refl:unit Sets the reference level unit. Parameter: 1 (dBm), 2 (dBmV), 3
(dBuV)Example: meas:refl:unit_1 (dBm)
meas:refl? Returns the reference level in the current unit.
Example: 30 (30dBm when the unit is dBm)
meas:refl Sets the reference level in the current unit.
Example: meas:refl_30 (30dBm when in dBm)
meas:refl:scale? Returns the amplitude scale.
Parameter: 1(10dB/Div), 2(5dB/Div), 3(2dB/Div), 4(1dB/Div)
meas:refl:scale Sets the amplitude scale. Parameter: 1(10dB/Div), 2(5dB/Div),
3(2dB/Div), 4(1dB/Div) Example: meas:refl:scale_1 (10dB/Div)
meas:refl:exg? Returns the external gain/loss in dB. Example: 6 (6dB)
meas:refl:exg Sets the external gain/loss. Example: meas:refl:exg_6 (6dB)
meas:refl:corr:edit Sets the amplitude correction data (frequency, amplitude). Need
to specify the table index and the number of correction.
Example: meas:refl:corr:edit_1_CR_2,100,40,150,30 (table
index1, 2 data, 100MHz/40dB, 150MHz/30dB)
meas:refl:corr:edit:
delall
Deletes all point in an amplitude correction set. Need to specify
set index. Example: meas:refl:corr:edit:delall_5 (delete set No.5)
meas:refl:corr:on? Returns the activated amplitude correction set.
Parameter: none, 1 to 5 (correction set)
meas:refl:corr:on? Returns the amplitude correction set is active or inactive. Need
to specify the set index. Parameter: on, off
Example: meas:refl:corr:on_1? (set No.1 is activated?)
meas:refl:corr:on Activates the amplitude correction set. Specify the set index.
Example: meas:refl:corr:on_1 (activate set No.1)
meas:refl:corr:off Deactivates the amplitude correction set. Specify set index.
Example: meas:refl:corr:off_1 (deactivate set No.1)
meas:inputz? Returns the input impedance. Parameter: 0 (50 ), 1 (75 )
meas:inputz Sets the input impedance. Parameter: 0 (50 ), 1 (75 )
Example: meas:inputz_0 (50)
meas:inputz:cal? Returns the input impedance calibration value in dB.
meas:inputz:cal Sets the input impedance calibration value in dB.
Example: meas:inputz:cal_5.9 (5.9dB)
Autoset

meas:autoset:run Runs autoset.
meas:autoset:amp:auto Sets the autoset amplitude floor setting to auto mode.
meas:autoset:amp:man Sets the autoset amplitude floor setting to manual mode.
Need to specify the amplitude in dB.
Example: meas:autoset:amp:man_20 (20dB)
REMOTE CONTROL
163
meas:autoset:amp:mode? Returns the autoset amplitude floor setting mode.
Parameter: auto, manual
meas:autoset:span:auto Sets the autoset frequency span setting to auto mode.
meas:autoset:span:man Sets the autoset frequency span setting to manual mode.
Need to specify unit. Example:
meas:autoset:span:man_100_khz (100kHz)
meas:autoset:span:mode? Returns the autoset frequency span setting mode.
Parameter: auto, manual
Marker & Peak Search

meas:mark:on? Returns marker On/Off. Need to specify the marker ID.
Parameter: on, off Example: meas:mark:on_1? (marker1 On?)
meas:mark:on Turn On marker. Parameter: 1to5 (marker ID), all (all
markers) Example: meas:mark:on_1 (marker 1 On)
meas:mark:off Turn Off marker. Parameter: 1 to 5 (marker ID), all (all
markers) Example: meas:mark:off_1 (marker 1 Off )
meas:mark:norm Sets a marker to normal mode. Parameter: 1 to 5 (marker ID)
Example: meas:mark:norm_1 (marker 1 normal mode)
meas:mark:norm:
freq?
Returns the frequency of a normal marker. Need to specify ID.
Example: meas:mark:norm:freq_1? (normal mkr1 frequency?)
meas:mark:norm:
level?
Returns the amplitude of a normal marker. Need to specify
ID. Example: meas:mark:norm:level_1? (normal mkr1 level?)
meas:mark:delta Sets a marker to delta mode. Also sets the relative frequency.
Parameter: 1 to 5 (marker ID)
Example: meas:mark:delta_1 (marker 1 in delta mode)
Example: meas:mark:delta_1_10_mhz (marker 1 in delta
mode, relative frequency 10MHz)
meas:mark:delta:freq? Returns the relative frequency of a delta mkr. Need to specify
ID. Example: meas:mark:delta:freq_1?(delta mkr1 freq?)
meas:mark:delta:
level?
Returns the relative amplitude of a delta mkr. Need to specify
ID.Example: meas:mark:delta:level_1?(delta mkr1 amp?)
meas:mark:tomin Moves a marker to minimum peak. Parameter: 1 to 5 (marker
ID) Example: meas:mark:tomin_1 (marker 1 to min peak)
meas:mark:topeak Moves a marker to the peak. Parameter: 1 to 5 (marker ID)
Example: meas:mark:topeak_1 (marker 1 to peak)
meas:mark:tonp Moves a normal/delta marker to the next peak.
Parameter: 1 to 5 (marker ID)
Example: meas:mark:tonp_1 (marker 1 to the next peak)
meas:mark:tonpr Moves a normal/delta marker to the next right peak.
Parameter: 1 to 5 (marker ID)
Example: meas:mark:tonpr_1 (marker 1 to the next right pk)
meas:mark:tonpl Moves a normal/delta marker to the next left peak.
Parameter: 1 to 5 (marker ID)
Example: meas:mark:tonpl_1 (marker 1 to the next left peak)
GSP-830 User Manual
164
meas:mark:tocen Moves a normal/delta marker to the center frequency.
Parameter: 1 to 5 (marker ID)
Example: meas:mark:tocen_1 (marker 1 to the center freq)
meas:mark:tost Moves a normal/delta marker to the start frequency.
Parameter: 1 to 5 (marker ID)
Example: meas:mark:tost_1 (marker 1 to the start frequency)
meas:mark:tostp Moves a normal/delta marker to the stop frequency.
Parameter: 1 to 5 (marker ID)
Example: meas:mark:tostp_1 (marker 1 to stop frequency)
meas:mark:toss Moves a normal/delta marker to the + step.
Parameter: 1 to 5 (marker ID)
Example: meas:mark:toss_1 (marker 1 to + step)
meas:mark:torefl Moves a normal/delta marker to the reference level.
Parameter: 1 to 5 (marker ID)
Example: meas:mark:torefl_1 (marker 1 to the reference level)
meas:mark:trace Moves a normal/delta marker to a trace.
Parameter: 1 to 5 (marker ID), followed by 0 (auto), 1
(traceA), 2 (traceB), 3 (traceC)
Example: meas:mark:trace_1_2 (marker 1 to traceB)
meas:mark:marktable:on Activates marker table.
meas:mark:marktable:off Deactivates marker table.
meas:mark:peaktable:on Activates peak table.
meas:mark:peaktable:off Deactivates peak table.
meas:mark:peaktable:sortf Sorts peak table by frequency.
meas:mark:peaktable:sorta Sorts peak table by amplitude.
meas:mark:peaktrack:on Turns On peak track. Parameter: 1 to 5 (marker ID)
Example: meas:mark:peaktrack:on_1(marker1 track on)
meas:mark:peaktrack:off Turns Off peak track. Parameter: 1 to 5 (marker ID)
Example: meas:mark:peaktrack:off_1(marker1 track off )
meas:mark:peakthres:on Turns On peak threshold and sets amplitude.
Parameter: peak threshold in dB. Example:
meas:mark:peakthres:on_30 (30dB threshold)
meas:mark:peakthres:off Turns Off peak threshold.
Trace

meas:tra Sets the mode for a trace. Parameter: 1 (traceA), 2 (traceB), 3
(traceC), followed by 1(clear), 2(peak hold), 3(view), 4(blank)
Example: meas:tra_1_2 (traceA set to peak hold mode)
meas:tra:avg:on Turns On average mode and sets average number for a trace.
Parameter: 1(traceA), 2(traceB), 3(traceC), followed by No.
Example: meas:tra:avg:on_1_20 (Average trace A 20 times)
meas:tra:avg:off Turns Off the average mode.
Parameter: 1 (traceA), 2 (traceB), 3 (traceC)
Example: meas:tra:avg:off_1 (traceA average mode Off )
REMOTE CONTROL
165
meas:tra:read? Returns trace data. Parameter:1(traceA), 2(traceB), 3(traceC),
all(all three traces) Example: meas:tra:read_1? (traceA data)
meas:tra:a<>b Swaps trace A and B.
meas:tra:a+b>a Adds trace B to A.
meas:tra:ab>a Subtracts trace B from A.
meas:tra:const? Returns the constant value to be added or subtracted.
meas:tra:const Sets the constant value to be added or subtracted.
meas:tra:a+const>a Adds a constant value to traceA.
meas:tra:aconst>a Subtracts a constant value from traceA.
meas:tra:det? Returns the detection mode.
Parameter: 1(normal), 2(sample), 3(peak+), 4(avg), 5(qpeak)
meas:tra:det Sets the detection mode.
Parameter: 1(normal), 2(sample), 3(peak+), 4(avg), 5(qpeak)
Example: meas:tra:det_4 (set the detection mode to average)
Power measurement

meas:ch:bw? Returns the main channel bandwidth.
Example: 1000 khz
meas:ch:bw Sets the main channel bandwidth. Need to specify the unit.
Example: meas:ch:bw_1_mhz (1MHz)
meas:adjch:bw? Returns the adjacent channel bandwidth in kHz. Need to
specify the channel.
Example: meas:adjch:bw_2? (adjacent channel2 bandwidth)
meas:adjch:bw Sets the adjacent channel bandwidth. Need to specify CH and
unit. Example: meas:adjch:bw_2_1_mhz(adj CH2 BW 1MHz)
meas:adjch:offs? Returns the adjacent channel offset in kHz. Specify channel.
Example: meas:adjch:offs_2? (adjacent channel2 offset)
meas:adjch:offs Sets the adjacent channel offset. Specify channel and unit.
Example: meas:adjch:offs_2_1_mhz (adjacent ch2 offs
1MHz)
meas:acpr? Returns ACPR activation status. Parameter: on, off
meas:acpr Turns On/Off ACPR measurement. Parameter: on, off
Example: meas:acpr_on (ACPR On)
meas:acpr:lower? Returns the lower ACPR result. Need to specify 1 or 2.
Example: meas:acpr:lower_2? (lower ACPR 2 result?)
meas:acpr:upper? Returns the upper ACPR result. Need to specify 1 or 2.
Example: meas:acpr:upper_2? (upper ACPR 2 result?)
meas:acpr:chup Moves the ACPR channel up.
meas:acpr:chdown Moves the ACPR channel down.
meas:chspc? Returns the channel space in kHz.
meas:chspc Sets the channel space. Need to specify the unit.
Example: meas:chspc_10_mhz (10MHz)
GSP-830 User Manual
166
meas:ocbw? Returns the OCBW activation/deactivation status.
Parameter:on,off
meas:ocbw Turns On/Off OCBW. Parameter: on, off
Example: meas:ocbw_on
meas:ocbw:bw? Returns the power measurement channel space in kHz.
meas:ocbw:per? Returns OCBW percentage.
meas:ocbw:per Sets OCBW percentage. Example: meas:ocbw:per_90 (90%)
meas:ndb? Returns N dB activation status. Parameter: on, off
meas:ndb Turns on/off N dB. Parameter: on, off Example: meas:ndb_on
meas:nbw:ndb? Returns N dB bandwidth. Example: 1000 khz
meas:nbw:ndb Sets N dB. Example: meas:ndb:ndb_3 (3 dB)
meas:jitter? Returns Phase Jitter on/off status. Parameter: on, off
meas:jitter Turns On/Off Phase Jitter. Parameter: on, off
Example: meas:jitter_on
meas:jitter:stoffs? Returns Phase Jitter start offset. Example: 0 khz
meas:jitter:stoffs Sets Phase Jitter start offset. Need to specify the unit.
Example: meas:jitter:stoffs_0_khz
meas:jitter:stpoffs? Returns Phase Jitter stop offset. Example: 50 khz
meas:jitter:stpoffs Sets Phase Jitter stop offset. Need to specify the unit.
Example: meas:jitter:stpoffs_50_khz
meas:jitter:phase? Returns Phase Jitter phase in radian. Example: 1.234 rad
meas:jitter:time? Returns Phase Jitter time in pico second. Example: 1.234psec
Limit line

meas:lmtline:on Turns On limit line. Parameter: 0 (low limit line), 1 (high limit
line) Example: meas:lmtline:on_0 (low limit line On)
meas:lmtline:off Turns Off limit line. Parameter: 0 (low limit line), 1 (high limit
line) Example: meas:lmtline:off_0 (low limit line Off )
meas:lmtline:passfail? Returns Pass/Fail test result. Parameter: 0 (Fail), 1 (Pass)
meas:lmtline:passfail Turns On/Off Pass/Fail test. Parameter: on, off
Example: meas:lmtline:passfail_on (Pass/Fail test On)
meas:lmtline:
passfail:criterion?
Returns Pass/Fail test criteria.
Parameter: 1 (pass if all signals are in the zone), 2 (pass if the
peaks are in the zone), 3 (pass if valleys are in the zone)
meas:lmtline:
passfail:criterion
Sets Pass/Fail test criteria.
Parameter: 1 (pass if all signals are in the zone), 2 (pass if the
peaks are in the zone), 3 (pass if valleys are in the zone)
Example: meas:lmtline:passfail:criterion_3
meas:lmtline:table? Returns limit line table On/Off. Parameter: on, off
meas:lmtline:table Turns On/Off limit line table. Parameter: on, off
Example: meas:lmtline:table_on (limit line table On)
REMOTE CONTROL
167
meas:lmtline:edit? Returns the limit line table data. Need to specify 0 (low limit
line), 1(high limit line) / limit line points.
Example: meas:lmtline:edit_0? Returns: 3,100,0,110,3,120,2
(low limit line, 3 points, 100MHz/0dB, 110MHz/3dB,
120MHz/2dB)
meas:lmtline:edit Sets the limit line table data. Need to specify 0 (low limit
line), 1(high limit line) / limit line points.
Example: meas:lmtline:edit_0_CR_3,100,2,110,3,120,2
(low limit line, 3 points, 100MHz/2dB,
110MHz/3dB,120MHz/2dB)
meas:lmtline:edit:
delall
Delete all points in limit line table.
Parameter: 0 (low limit line), 1(high limit line)
Example: meas:lmtline:edit:delall_0 (delete low lline table)
BW

con:rbw:auto Sets RBW to auto.
con:rbw? Returns the RBW (resolution bandwidth).
Parameter: 0 (300Hz), 1 (3kHz), 2 (9kHz), 3 (10kHz), 4
(30kHz), 5 (100kHz), 6 (120kHz), 7 (300kHz), 8 (4MHz)
con:rbw:man Selects the RBW. Parameter: 0 (300Hz), 1 (3kHz), 2 (9kHz), 3
(10kHz), 4 (30kHz), 5 (100kHz), 6 (120kHz), 7 (300kHz), 8
(4MHz) Example: con:rbw:man_1 (sets RBW to 300Hz)
con:rbw:mode? Returns RBW mode. Parameter: auto, manual
con:vbw:auto Sets VBW to auto.
con:vbw? Returns the VBW. Parameter: 0 (10Hz), 1 (30Hz), 2 (100Hz),
3 (300Hz), 4 (1kHz), 5 (3kHz), 6 (10kHz), 7 (30kHz), 8
(100kHz), 9 (300kHz), 10 (1MHz)
con:vbw:man Selects the VBW. Parameter: 0 (10Hz), 1 (30Hz), 2 (100Hz), 3
(300Hz), 4 (1kHz), 5 (3kHz), 6 (10kHz), 7 (30kHz), 8
(100kHz), 9 (300kHz), 10 (1MHz)
Example: con:vbw:man_4 (sets VBW to 1kHz)
con:vbw:mode? Returns VBW mode. Parameter: auto, manual
con:swt:auto Sets the sweep time to auto.
con:swt:man Sets the sweep time in msec.
Example: con:swt:man_50 (sets the sweep time to 50ms)
con:swt? Returns the sweep time in msec.
con:swt:mode? Returns the sweep time mode. Parameter: auto, manual
con:allcouple Sets the RBW, VBW, and sweep time to auto.
Trigger

con:trig:freerun Sets the trigger to free run mode.
con:trig:video Sets the trigger to video and sets the trigger level in current
unit. Example: con:trig:video_20 (video mode, 20dBm)
GSP-830 User Manual
168
con:trig:single Sets the trigger condition to single.
con:trig:cont Sets the trigger condition to continuous.
con:trig:ext Sets the trigger to external mode.
con:trig:delay Sets the trigger delay in msec.
Example: con:trig:delay_1000 (1000ms delay)
con:trig:freq Sets the trigger frequency in MHz.
Example: con:trig:freq_1 (1MHz)
Display

con:disp:dim Selects the display dimmer level. Parameter: 0 to 5
Example: con:disp:dim_2 (dimmer level 2)
con:disp:dl Turns On/Off display line. Parameter: on, off
Example: con:disp:dl_on (display line On)
con:disp:dl:level Sets the display line level in current unit.
Example: con:disp:dl:level_50 (display line at 50dBm)
con:disp:title:show Sets and shows the display title. The title is case sensitive.
Example: con:disp:title:show_SAtest (title is SAtest)
con:disp:title:clr Clears the display title.
con:disp:split:upper Turns On and sweeps upper window in split window mode.
con:disp:split:lower Turns On and sweeps lower window in split window mode.
con:disp:split:alt Sweeps the upper/lower window alternatively in split mode.
con:disp:split:full Goes back to full screen mode.
File

con:file:copy Copies file. Need to specify the source and destination file.
Parameter: ta/tb/tc (traceA/B/C), t1to10 (trace1to10), lh/ll
(high/low limit line), lh1to5 (high limit line 1to5), ll1to5 (low
limit line 1to5), c1to5 (correction set 1to5), q1to10 (sequence
1to10), s1to10 (setup 1to10), file name in USB flash drive
Example: con:file:copy_t10_ta (copy from trace10 to traceA)
Example: con:file:copy_ta_mytrace (copy from traceA to a file
in external USB flash named mytrace)
con:file:del Deletes file. Need to specify the source and destination file.
Parameter: ta/tb/tc (traceA/B/C), t1to10 (trace1to10), lh/ll
(high/low limit line), lh1to5 (high limit line 1to5), ll1to5 (low
limit line 1to5), c1to5 (correction set 1to5), q1to10 (sequence
1to10), s1to10 (setup file 1to10), file name in external USB
flash drive. Example: con:file:del_t10 (delete trace10)
Example: con:file:del_myspace (delete a file names myspace
in extrenal USB flash drive)
con:file:prtsc:tofile Saves the display image to external USB flash drive. Need to
specify the file name. Example: con:file:prtsc:tofile_myscreen
(saves the display image to a file named myscreen)
REMOTE CONTROL
169
Preset

con:preset Presets the GSP-830.
System

con:sys:setup:save Save the current system setting. Parameter: 1to10
Example: con:sys:setup:save_1 (save current setup to setup1)
con:sys:setup:recall Recalls a system setting from setup file. Parameter: 1to10
Example: con:sys:setup:recall_1 (recall setting in setup1 file)
con:sys:gpibaddr? Returns the current GPIB address.
con:sys:gpibaddr Sets the GPIB address. Example: con:sys:gpibaddr_2
con:sys:calsig Turns On/Off the auxiliary signal. Parameter: on, off
Example: con:sys:calsig_on (auxiliary signal On)
con:sys:clock:date? Returns the current date setting.
Parameter: year/month/ day/ day of week 1 (Mon) to 7(Sun)
Example: 2006/6/24/6 (June 24
th
, Saturday, 2006)
con:sys:clock:date Sets the date.
Parameter: year/month/day/ day of week 1 (Mon) to 7(Sun)
Example: con:sys:clock:date_2006_6_24_6 (Jun24, Sat, 2006)
con:sys:clock:time? Returns the current time setting.
Parameter: hour : minute : second
Example: 13:30:26 (1p.m., 30 minutes, 26 second)
con:sys:clock:time Sets the time. Parameter: hour_minute_second
Example: con:sys:clock:time_13_30_26 (1p.m., 30min, 26sec)
con:sys:clock:show Turns On/Off clock display. Parameter: on, off
Example: con:sys:clock:show_on (clock display On)
con:sys:selftest? Returns the self test result. Parameter: 0 (fail), 1 (pass) in the
following order: GPIB/Flash/SDRAM/RTC
Example: 1 1 0 1 (GPIBpass,Flashpass,SDRAMfail,RTCpass)
con:sys:lang Selects language. Parameter: 1 (English), 2 (Simplified
Chinese) Example: con:sys:lang_2 (simplified Chinese)
con:sys:ser? Returns the serial number. Example: EE8300000
con:sys:swver? Returns the software version.
Example: v1.0 06/07/28 (version 1.0, 2006 July 28
th
)
con:sys:fwver? Returns the firmware version. Example: v1.0 (version 1.0)
con:sys:hwver? Returns hardware version in following order. RF, IF, DSP, MB
Example: v1.0 v1.0 v1.01 v1.0 (RF: version 1.0, IF: version 1.0,
DSP: version 1.01, MB: version 1.0)
con:sys:optstatus? Returns optional items installation status in the following
order. 300HzRBW, EMIFilter, 10k/100kHzRBW, TG,
Demodulator, Medref (1ppm stability) Parameter: 0 (not
installed), 1 (installed)
Example: 0 0 1 1 1 (TG, Demodulator, Medref are installed)
GSP-830 User Manual
170
Option

con:opt:tg Turns On/Off Tracking Generator (TG). Parameter: on, off
Example: con:opt:tg_on (TG On)
con:opt:tg:level? Returns the TG level.
con:opt:tg:level Sets the TG level.
con:opt:tg:norm Turns On/Off TG normalization. Parameter: on, off
Example: con:opt:tg:norm_on (normalization On)
con:opt:tg:refval? Returns the TG reference value.
con:opt:tg:refval Sets the TG reference value.
con:opt:dm:fm Turns On/Off FM in the demodulator. Parameter: on, off
Example: con:opt:dm:fm_on (FM On)
con:opt:dm:am Turns On/Off AM in the demodulator. Parameter: on, off
Example: con:opt:dm:am_on (AM On)
con:opt:dm:spk Turns On/Off phone output in the demodulator.
Parameter: on, off Example: con:opt:dm:spk_on (phone On)
con:opt:dm:vol Sets the demodulator phone output volume.
con:opt:dm:sql? Returns the demodulator squelch level.
con:opt:dm:sql Sets the demodulator squelch level.
con:opt:bat? Returns the battery level.
con:opt:extreffreq? Returns the external reference frequency.
con:opt:extreffreq Sets the external reference frequency.
Example: con:opt:extreffreq_1_mhz (1MHz)
Sequence

con:seq:runmode Selects the sequence run mode.
Parameter: 1 (repeat mode), 2 (single mode)
Example: con:seq:runmode_2 (sequence runs in sing mode)
con:seq:runseq Runs the sequence. Parameter: sequence index, 1 to 10
Example: con:seq:runseq_2 (run sequence 2)
con:seq:stopseq Stops the running sequence.
con:seq:delallseq Deletes all programmed sequence.
con:seq:delseq Deletes a sequence. Parameter: sequence index, 1 to 10
Example: con:seq:delseq_2 (delete sequence 2)
FAQ
171
FAQ
I pressed the power (ON/STBY) key on the front panel but nothing
happens.
Make sure you turned on the rear panel power switch.
For details, see page20.
Note that after proper sequence, it takes around 10
seconds for the display to become active.
I cannot even see the defaul t green line on the display.
Check if the TraceBlank (hide trace from the display) is
on for TraceA, the default waveform. Press the Trace key
F1 (select TraceA)F2 (Clear) to recover the trace.
For details, see page74.
I connected the signal but it does not appear on screen.
Run the Autoset and let the GSP-830 find the best
display scale for your target signal. Press the Autoset key,
then press F1 (Autoset). For details, see page58.
I want to see which optional items are installed.
Check the optional item status in the system information
window. Press the System key F6 (More) F4
(System Config On). For details, see page129.
The Pre-amplifier (GAP-801 or GAP-802, page56) is a
completely external item, therefore does not appear in
the system information menu.
The GSP-830 performance does not match the specification.
Make sure the device is powered on for at least 30
minutes, within +18Cto+28C. This is necessary to
stabilize the unit to match the specification.
If there is still a problem, please contact your local dealer or GWInstek at
marketing@goodwill.com.tw.
GSP-830 User Manual
172
Appendix
GSP-830 Specifications
The following specifications apply when the GSP-830 is powered on for at
least 30 minutes within +18C to +28C.

Frequency Range 9kHz to 3.0GHz
Aging Rate 10ppm, 0-50C, 5ppm/yr
Span Range
2kHz to 3.0GHz in 1/2/5 sequence, full span,
zero span
Phase Noise -80dBc/Hz @ 1GHz 20kHz Offset typical
Frequency
Sweep Time Range 50ms to 25.6s
RBW Range 3kHz, 30kHz, 300kHz, 4MHz
RBW Accuracy 15%
Resolution
Bandwidth
VBW Range 10Hz to 1MHz in 1-3 steps
Measurement Range
(Span: 50kHz, RBW:
3kHz)
103dBm to +20dBm:
1 MHz to 15MHz, Ref Lvl @ 30dBm
117dBm to +20dBm:
15MHz to 1GHz, Ref Lvl 110dBm
114dBm to +20dBm:
1GHz to 3GHz, Ref Lvl 110dBm
Overload Protection Max. +30dBm, 25VDC
Reference Level Range 110dBm to +20dBm
Accuracy 1dB @100MHz
Frequency Flatness 1dB
Amplitude
Display Range
Linearity
1dB over 70dB
Average Noise Floor
< 1351dBm/Hz:
1MHz to 15MHz, Ref Lvl @ 30dBm
< 149dBm/Hz, typical 152dBm/Hz:
15MHz to1GHz, Ref Lvl 110dBm
< 146dBm/Hz, typical 149dBm/Hz:
1GHz to 3GHz, Ref Lvl 110dBm
Third Intermodulation
<-70dBc, RF Input @-40dBm,
Ref Level @ 30dBm
Harmonic Distortion
<-60dBc, RF Input < -40dBm,
Ref Level @30dBm
Dynamic Range
Non-Harmonic
Spurious
(Span: 50kHz, RBW:
3kHz)
< 93dBm: 1MHz to 15MHz,
RefLvl 30dBm
< 107dBm: 15MHz to 1GHz,
RefLvl 110dBm
< 104dBm: 1GHz to 3GHz,
RefLvl 110dBm
Appendix
173
Display 640 x 480 high-res color TFT LCD
Split Windows
Active Window: Upper, Lower, or Alternate (two
simultaneously sweeping windows)
Markers
10 markers for peaks: 5 normal-delta marker
pairs. Function: Delta, To Peak, To Minimum,
Peak Track, Peak Table, Peak Sort
Trace Detection
3 traces with Peak, Maximum hold, Freeze,
Average, and Trace Math
Power Measurement
ACPR, OCBW, Channel power, N dB, and Phase
Jitter
Autoset Function
Auto tuning the measurement result for
observation
Trigger
Conditions: Video, External (Positive-going
+5V-TTL ext. signal) Modes: Normal, Single,
Continuous
General
Sequence
Automated test by user defined macros without
any remote controller.
10 sequential macro sets and 10 macros per
each set. Variable Delays and Wait-to-Go
facilitate automated measurement.
Do-Sequence links and nests different sequence
sets.
RF Input
Type: N Female, 50 nominal
RF input VSWR: <2:1, @0dBm Ref Lvl
External Reference
Clock Input (MHz)
Type: BNC Female, 1M, 1.544M, 2.048M, 5M,
10M, 10.24M, 13M, 15.36M, 15.4M, 19.2M
Ref. Clock Output Type: BNC Female, 10MHz
DC Input (DC Power
Operation)
Jack: 5.5mm, 12V
Connectors
DC Output (for
pre-amplifier)
Type: SMA Male, output +9V/100mA max.
RS-232C Sub-D 9pins Female
USB Connector
USB Host/Device fully supported
Front Panel: Type A receptacle for USB flash
drives. Rear Panel: Type mini-B receptacle for
PC remote control.
VGA Output Sub-D 15pins Female
Interface
GPIB (option) Fully programmable with IEEE488.2 compliance
Accessories
User Manual x1, Power Cord x1, USB Cable (Type A plug to Type mini-B
plug) x 1
Power Source AC 100V to 240V, 50/60Hz
Dimensions &
Weight
330 (W) 170(H) 340(D) mm, Approx. 6kg
Operation
Environment
Temperature: 18 to 28
Relative Humidity: < 90%
Storage Environment
Temperature: 0 to 40
Relative Humidity: < 85%
GSP-830 User Manual
174
Optional Items Specifications

Frequency Range 9kHz to 3.0GHz
Amplitude Range -50dBm to 0 dBm
Amplitude Accuracy 1dB @100MHz, 0dBm
Amplitude Flatness 1dB @0dBm
Harmonics <-30dBc typical
Reverse Power +30dBm
Impedance Type: N female, 50 nominal
Opt.01 Tracking
Generator
RF Output VSWR < 2:1
Opt.02 Battery Pack Battery Type 11.1V Li-Ion battery pack x 2
Output Range 1ppm, 0to50C
Opt. 03 1ppm Stability
Aging Rate 1ppm / year
RBW Selection 300Hz
Opt. 04 300Hz RBW
RBW Accuracy 20%
RBW Selections 9kHz and 120kHz, 6dB bandwidth Opt. 05 9kHz&120kHz
RBW(= EMI Filter)
RBW Accuracy 15%
RBW Selections 10kHz and 100kHz, 3dB bandwidth Opt. 06 10kHz &
100kHz RBW
RBW Accuracy 15%
Demodulation AM, FM
Output 3.5mm stereo jack wired for mono operation
RBW Selections 10kHz and 100kHz, 3dB bandwidth
Opt. 07 Demodulator
RBW Accuracy 15%
Opt. 08 GPIB Interface Compliant standard IEEE 488 bus
ADP-001 BNC(J/F)to N(P/M) adaptor
ADP-002 SMA(J/F)to N(P/M) adaptor
ADP-101 BNC(J/F)75 to BNC(P/M)50 adaptor
ATA-001 BNC antenna
ATN-100 10dB attenuator N(J/F) to N(P/M)
GAK-001 Termination 50 N(P/M)
GAK-002 Cap with chain N(P/M)
GAP-801 10dB Preamplifier: 9kHz to 6GHz, 10dB typical
GAP-802 20dB Preamplifier: 9kHz to 3GHz, 20dB typical
ADP-002 SMA (J/F) to N (P/M) adaptor x 2 GKT-001 General Kit Set
ATN-001 10dB Attenuator, N (J) to N(P) x 1
Appendix
175
GTL-303 RF Cable (RD316, SMA(P), 60cm) x 2
GSC-002 Kit box x 1
ADP-001 BNC (J/F) to N (P/M) adaptor x 2
ADP-101 BNC (P/M) 50 to BNC (J/F) 75 adaptor x2
GTL-304 RF Cable (RG223, N(P)-N(J), 30cm) x 2
GKT-002 CATV Kit set
GSC-003 Kit box x 1
GAK-001 Termination, 50, N(P) x 1
GAK-002 Cap with chain, N(P) x 1
GTL-302 RF Cable assembly (RG223+N(P), 30cm) x 2
GKT-003 RLB Kit set
GSC-004 Kit box x 1
ADP-01 BNC (J/F) to N (P/M) adaptor x 1
ADP-02 SMA (J/F) to N (P/M) adaptor x 1
ANT-01 6cm loop, H-Field probe x 1
ANT-02 3cm loop, H-Field probe x 1
ANT-03 6mm loop, H-Field probe x 1
PR-03 Touch passive probe, < 3GHz x 1
Test Lead RF Cable BNC (P/M) to BNC (P/M) x 1
GKT-006 EMI Probe set
Test Lead RF Cable SMA (P/M) to SMA (P/M) x 1
GRA-404 19 inch Rack adaptor panel, 4U
GTL-301 RF Cable assembly RG223, N(P/M) 100cm
GTL-302 RF Cable assembly RG223, N(P/M) 30cm
GTL-303 RF Cable assembly RD316, SMA(P/J) 60cm
GTL-304 RF Cable assembly RG223, N(P/M) to N(J/F) 30cm
GTL-401 DC power cord with DC Jack and lighter plug, 5A
GSC-001 Soft Carrying Case: available to accommodate the field operations
Frequency range 10MHz to 1GHz
Directivity 10MHz to 100MHz: > 48dB
100MHz to 1000MHz: > 38dB
Insertion loss Source to Load: < 10dB
Load to Coupler: < 7dB
Return loss Source return loss: > 7dB
Load return loss: > 11dB
Coupler return loss: > 17dB
Impedance 50 (Characteristic Impedance)
Connector N type, Source/load: female, Coupler: male
RLB-001 Return Loss
Bridge
Dimension & weight 88 x 54 x 32 (mm), 230g
Note: Among Opt. 05 to 07, only one item can be installed to the GSP-830.
The following are factory installed items. Opt. 01, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07
GSP-830 User Manual
176
Declaration of Conformity
We
GOOD WILL INSTRUMENT CO., LTD.
(1) No.7-1, Jhongsing Rd., Tucheng City, Taipei County, Taiwan
(2) No. 69, Lu San Road, Suzhou City (Xin Qu), Jiangsu Sheng, China
declare, that the below mentioned product
Type of Product: Digital Spectrum Analyzer
Model Number: GSP-830
are herewith confirmed to comply with the requirements set out in the
Council Directive on the Approximation of the Law of Member States
relating to Electromagnetic Compatibility (89/336/EEC, 92/31/EEC,
93/68/EEC) and Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC, 93/68/EEC).
For the evaluation regarding the Electromagnetic Compatibility and Low
Voltage Directive, the following standards were applied:
EMC
EN 61326-1: Electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory
use EMC requirements (1997 + A1:1998 + A2:2001 + A3:2003)
Conducted Emission
Radiated Emission
EN 55011: Class A 1998 + A1:1999
+ A2:2002
Electrostatic Discharge
EN 61000-4-2: 1995 + A1:1998 +
A2:2001
Current Harmonics
EN 61000-3-2: 2000 + A2:2005
Radiated Immunity
EN 61000-4-3: 2002 + A1:2002
Voltage Fluctuations
EN 61000-3-3: 1995 + A1:2001
Electrical Fast Transients
EN 61000-4-4: 2004
------------------------- Surge Immunity
EN 61000-4-5: 1995 + A1:2001
------------------------- Conducted Susceptibility
EN 61000-4-6: 1996 + A1:2001
------------------------- Power Frequency Magnetic Field
EN 61000-4-8: 1993 + A1:2001
------------------------- Voltage Dip/ Interruption
EN 61000-4-11: 2004
Safety
Low Voltage Equipment Directive 73/23/EEC
Safety Requirements
IEC/EN 61010-1: 2001
INDEX
177
INDEX
1
1ppm stability
error message......................................22
specifications.......................................175
5
50ohm/75ohm..........................................57
A
accessories list......................................... 11
ACPR.......................................................83
adjacent channel.................................83
activate
ACPR...................................................83
all marker at once...............................64
amplitude correction ..........................54
autoset.................................................60
delta marker .......................................64
demodulator......................................144
limit line..............................................91
N dB.....................................................88
OCBW..................................................86
phase jitter..........................................89
phone output.....................................144
TG......................................................142
trace.....................................................74
AM demodulator ...................................144
amplitude ................................................48
command set .....................................162
copy correction file............................ 115
delete correction file ......................... 119
menu tree ......................................31, 32
operation shortcut ..............................26
peak sort..............................................72
preset contents..................................123
specifications.......................................173
amplitude correction...............................52
file type.............................................. 114
amplitude floor........................................61
autoset .....................................................58
amplitude floor....................................61
command set .....................................162
how autoset works..............................59
in functionality check.........................24
menu tree ............................................31
operation shortcut ..............................26
preset contents ................................. 123
auxiliary signal............................... 23, 135
average
signal detection .................................. 81
trace .................................................... 75
waveform.......................................... 101
B
bandwidth............................................... 95
command set..................................... 167
menu tree............................................ 35
operation shortcut.............................. 28
preset contents ................................. 123
specifications ...................................... 173
battery................................................... 148
life ..................................................... 149
safety instruction................................. 7
specifications ...................................... 175
C
cable TV .................................................. 57
kit set.................................................. 176
calibration
error message............................. 22, 128
input impedance................................. 57
caution symbol.......................................... 6
center and span ...................................... 42
center frequency ..................................... 42
move marker to .................................. 66
move peak to....................................... 70
channel bandwidth
ACPR .................................................. 83
OCBW................................................. 86
channel space
ACPR .................................................. 83
OCBW................................................. 86
cleaning the GSP-830............................... 7
clear trace ............................................... 74
COM port selection............................... 153
command syntax................................... 160
continuous trigger mode ...................... 105
cooling fan caution ................................... 7
copy file ................................................. 115
D
date setting........................................... 132
dB unit selection..................................... 50
GSP-830 User Manual
178
DC input ............................................... 148
specifications.................................... 174
DC operation ........................................ 149
DC output ............................................... 56
specifications.................................... 174
delay in sequence set ........................... 138
delete
amplitude correction.......................... 55
limit line ............................................. 93
sequence ........................................... 139
delete file ...............................................118
delta marker........................................... 64
demodulator.......................................... 144
specifications...................................... 175
destination files, copy ...........................116
detection mode........................................ 80
display .................................................... 107
clock activation ................................ 132
command set .................................... 168
FAQ................................................... 172
menu tree ........................................... 35
operation shortcut................................. 29
preset contents................................. 123
save image.........................................111
split ....................................................110
title.................................................... 109
VGA output ....................................... 111
display line ........................................... 108
E
edit file name
when copy file....................................117
when rename.................................... 120
when save image.............................. 122
EMI filter.............................................. 146
bandwidthconfiguration.................. 100
specifications...................................... 175
EMI probe set ....................................... 176
EN 55011 declaration of conformity ... 177
EN 61010
declaration of conformity................. 177
measurement category ........................ 7
pollution degree ................................... 8
environment
safety instruction................................. 7
specifications.................................... 174
error
message list........................................ 22
message on power up......................... 21
self test result .................................... 22
external offset......................................... 51
external reference signal ..................... 134
external trigger .................................... 105
F
feature list .............................................. 10
file...........................................................113
command set..................................... 168
copy.................................................... 115
delete................................................. 118
display image.................................... 121
menu tree...................................... 36, 37
operation shortcut .............................. 29
preset contents ................................. 123
rename .............................................. 120
type.................................................... 114
USB icon ........................................... 114
Flash memory self test ........................... 22
FM demodulator ................................... 144
free run.................................................. 104
freeze trace.............................................. 75
frequency................................................. 41
command set..................................... 161
menu tree............................................ 31
operation shortcut .............................. 26
peak sort ............................................. 72
preset contents ................................. 123
specifications ...................................... 173
frequency adjustment point ................... 16
frequency step......................................... 42
full span................................................... 46
functionality check ................................. 23
PC software....................................... 153
fuse instruction......................................... 7
G
GAP-801/802 ........................................... 56
specifications ...................................... 175
general kit set .......................................... 175
GPIB
configuration..................................... 127
constraints ........................................ 128
functionality check........................... 159
self test........................................ 22, 127
specifications .................................... 174
ground symbol........................................... 6
H
hardware version.................................. 129
hide trace................................................. 75
high limit line ......................................... 91
high voltage symbol .................................. 6
I
icon
75ohm impedance............................... 57
amplitude correction.......................... 52
battery level ...................................... 149
external offset..................................... 51
external reference............................. 134
internal reference median ............... 134
peak track..................................... 65, 69
RBW manual ...................................... 96
INDEX
179
sequence running .............................141
sweep time ........................................101
TG normalized ..................................143
trace average...............................76, 102
trace clear mode..................................74
trace math...........................................78
trace peak hold ...................................75
trace view............................................75
trigger external.................................105
trigger video......................................104
USB ................................................... 114
VBW manual.......................................98
icon overview...........................................19
IEEE488.2 .............................................157
standard commands .........................161
impedance offset .....................................57
impedance selection................................57
initial display ..........................................21
menu tree ......................................25, 31
shortcut .........................................25, 26
interface configuration .........................126
L
language
selection.............................................135
version...............................................129
last span setting......................................47
last stored settings..................................21
LCD dimmer..........................................108
limit line ..................................................90
command set .....................................166
copy file ............................................. 115
delete file........................................... 119
file type.............................................. 114
menu tree ............................................34
operation shortcut ..............................28
preset contents..................................123
local oscillator error message.................22
low limit line ...........................................91
M
marker .....................................................62
activate all at once..............................64
command set .....................................163
marker table .......................................67
marker to center .................................66
marker to peak....................................65
menu tree ............................................32
operation shortcut ..............................26
PC software.......................................155
peak track ...........................................69
preset contents..................................123
specifications.....................................174
to center frequency.............................66
to reference level.................................66
to start/stop frequency .......................66
to trace...........................................67, 76
marker table ........................................... 67
minimum peak........................................ 71
month setting........................................ 132
N
N dB ........................................................ 88
normal detection mode........................... 80
normal marker........................................ 63
normal trigger mode............................. 105
numerical keys example ........................ 15
O
OCBW ..................................................... 86
offset
amplitude............................................ 51
phase jitter ......................................... 89
operation environment............................. 7
option
command set..................................... 170
menu tree............................................ 39
operation shortcut.............................. 30
preset contents ................................. 123
optional item
10/100kHz RBW................................. 96
300Hz RBW........................................ 96
9k/120kHz RBW................................. 96
battery .............................................. 148
demodulator ..................................... 144
EMI filter.................................... 96, 146
FAQ................................................... 172
installed items.................................. 129
list of options ...................................... 11
pre-amplifier....................................... 56
specifications .................................... 175
TG ..................................................... 142
overview
display................................................. 18
display icon......................................... 19
features............................................... 10
front panel .......................................... 13
menu tree............................................ 31
operation shortcuts ............................ 26
preset .................................................. 40
rear panel ........................................... 16
P
package contents .................................... 11
panel settings
copy file............................................. 115
delete file .......................................... 119
file type ............................................. 115
save/recall ......................................... 125
pass/fail test............................................ 94
pause sequence..................................... 138
PC requirement for software ............... 151
PC software........................................... 150
GSP-830 User Manual
180
installation....................................... 151
peak hold trace....................................... 74
peak search............................................. 68
command set .................................... 163
menu tree ........................................... 33
minimum peak................................... 71
next peak............................................ 70
operation shortcut.............................. 27
peak table........................................... 71
preset contents................................. 123
peak signal
in autoset............................................ 59
search.................................................. 69
peak table ............................................... 71
peak threshold........................................ 72
percentage, OCPW................................. 86
phase jitter.............................................. 89
phone output......................................... 144
positive peak detection .......................... 80
power measurement............................... 82
ACPR.................................................. 83
command set .................................... 165
menu tree ........................................... 34
N dB.................................................... 88
OCBW................................................. 86
operation shortcut.............................. 27
phase jitter ......................................... 89
preset contents................................. 123
power supply safety instruction.............. 7
power up sequence ................................. 20
FAQ................................................... 172
pre-amplifier........................................... 56
specifications...................................... 175
preset .................................................... 123
command set .................................... 169
contents .............................................. 40
printout display image......................... 155
protective conductor symbol .................... 6
Q
quasi-peak detection.............................. 81
R
RBW........................................................ 96
9k/120kHz RBW............................... 146
error message..................................... 22
RBW configuration............................... 100
real-time clock self test .......................... 23
recall
amplitude correction.......................... 55
panel settings................................... 125
reference level ........................................ 49
move marker to.................................. 66
reference signal
error message..................................... 22
master............................................... 133
settings ............................................. 129
slave .................................................. 134
specifications .................................... 174
remote control ....................................... 157
PC software....................................... 150
return loss bridge..................................... 176
accessory kit set................................... 176
RS-232C
configurations................................... 126
specifications .................................... 174
RTC test result ..................................... 131
S
sample detection mode ........................... 80
save
panel settings ................................... 125
waveform from PC software ............ 155
SCPI....................................................... 157
SDRAM self test ..................................... 23
self test result ......................................... 22
sequence ................................................ 136
command set..................................... 170
copy file ............................................. 115
delete file........................................... 119
edit..................................................... 137
file type ............................................. 114
menu tree............................................ 39
operation shortcut .............................. 30
preset contents ................................. 123
run..................................................... 140
specifications .................................... 174
serial number........................................ 129
service operation
contact............................................... 172
menu ................................................. 135
signal detection....................................... 80
in EMI filter...................................... 146
single trigger mode............................... 105
soft carrying case.................................. 176
source files, copy ................................... 115
span ................................................... 41, 43
command set..................................... 161
menu tree............................................ 31
operation shortcut .............................. 26
preset contents ................................. 123
specifications ...................................... 173
specifications
FAQ ................................................... 172
GSP-830 ............................................ 173
optional item..................................... 175
split display........................................... 110
squelch, demodulator setting............... 145
start and stop.......................................... 44
move marker to................................... 66
start frequency........................................ 44
stop frequency......................................... 45
storage environment................................. 7
sweep time............................................. 101
INDEX
181
synchronization
master ...............................................133
slave...................................................134
system.....................................................124
command set .....................................169
error message....................................128
menu tree ............................................38
operation shortcut .................................29
preset contents..................................123
system configuration ............................129
T
table of contents........................................3
TG ..........................................................142
level ...................................................142
normalization....................................143
reversed power level caution ...............6
specifications.......................................175
tilt stand..................................................20
time domain view....................................46
time setting ...........................................132
title, display...........................................109
trace .........................................................73
average................................................75
clear .....................................................74
command set .....................................164
copy file ............................................. 115
delete file........................................... 119
FAQ....................................................172
file type.............................................. 114
freeze ...................................................75
menu tree ............................................33
move marker to.............................67, 76
operation shortcut ..............................27
preset contents..................................123
specifications.....................................174
trace math ...............................................78
trigger ....................................................103
command set .....................................167
continuous trigger ............................105
delay ..................................................106
external .............................................105
menu tree............................................ 35
normal trigger .................................. 105
operation shortcut.............................. 28
preset contents ................................. 123
single trigger .................................... 105
specifications .................................... 174
video.................................................. 104
U
UK power cord requirement .................... 8
USB
file copy............................................. 115
file delete .......................................... 118
file rename........................................ 120
icon.................................................... 114
save display image....................111, 121
slave configuration........... 126, 152, 158
specifications .................................... 174
V
VBW........................................................ 98
error message..................................... 22
VBW configuration............................... 100
version information.............................. 129
vertical unit ............................................ 50
VGA output ............................................111
specifications .................................... 174
video trigger.......................................... 104
W
warning symbol ........................................ 6
website, Good Will Instruments.......... 151
Y
year setting........................................... 132
Z
zero span................................................. 46


1











USERS MANUAL






RF Field Strength Analyzer

99 Washingt on St reet
Melrose, MA 02176
Phone 781- 665- 1400
Toll Free 1- 800- 517- 8431

Visit us at www. Test Equipment Depot . com


?
3201N/3290N USERS MANUAL













In order to keep the Protek 3201N/3290N RF Field Strength
Analyzer continuously updated, information in this manual is
subject to change without notice.
Please contact us, if you have any question about version
upgrade and amendment.

3
Safety Term and symbols








.












Danger statements identify condition or practices that could result in injury
or loss of life.
Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in
damage or fire.
Ground statements identify conditions or practices that could connect
protective conductor.


4
3201N/3290N USERS MANUAL
Caution for safety

Prohibiting to removal the cover

Do not remove the instrument cover to access the internal components. Only GS
Instruments Service team or technician with knowledge of the instruments condition and
dangerous voltages can repair the instrument.
Instruments that appear damaged or defective should be made inoperative and secured
against unintended operation until they can be repaired by qualified service personnel.


Keep the clean on power insert

Instruments power insert should remain dust free.
Clean the power insert regularly. Dust could result in damage to this instrument.
Continually clean the dust on input terminal of RF frequency counter.
Clean the input terminal regularly. Dust could result in damage to the instrument.


RF in/output rating

Rating of RF input and output connector
Maximum DC voltage rating
RF input connector (socket): N type female, 50Ohms
Maximum RF input power: 5Vrms
Caution: Do not use over 5Vrms supplied and/or (-) power could result in damage to this
instrument

Do not operate this instrument if there is any doubt it is functioning properly: if
operating personnel feel the instrument is not operating properly, return this instrument
to GS Instrument for service and repair to ensure the safety features are maintained.

5
DC Power

The operating Personnel must use the DC adaptor supplied, combining this instrument. The
other adaptor could result in damage to this instrument and it is the limitation of warranty
Exterior DC input connector should be matched with polar. DC connector tip must attach with
(+) polar grounding.

The operating personnel must use grounded power Restore this instrument


Restore this instrument

Do not attempt to operate this instrument for long durations and avoid restoring this instrument.
Avoid direct light
Keep away the heating system
Avoid high temperature (Ex. Inside of the car during the summer time)
Keep about from liquids
Avoid high moisture and/or poor ventilation
Keep away dust and/or smoke
Avoid extremely low temperature
Keep away from hazard of return strokes












6
3201N/3290N USERS MANUAL
Protek 3201N/3290N Ni-MH battery is rechargeable. Battery is recharged bases on the
battery temperature. Charging is controlled from the power of the battery cell and the
temperature of the battery. Ni-MH Rechargeable battery is going to increase temp slowly until
the temperature is extremely higher. Battery charging is finished automatically by checking the
degree of the temperature (dT/dt). For battery protection, when the power of Battery cell is
increased, comparing regular temperature and/or exterior temperature degree of when the
temperature increases over 50 degrees, battery charging will be finished automatically.
Operating personnel must use Ni-MH Rechargeable Battery and do not operate in an
explosive atmosphere.
- The battery usage time can change due to the using term, environment and temperature.
- When battery consumption is large battery-running time will decrease.
Operating personnel should phase in a new battery when battery-running time is less than
half (Warrant period is 6 month, after instrument use has begun.)
- Operating personnel should not use this instrument and/or keep the battery in place for
long periods of time, which could result in discharge of the battery.
- To avoid damages to battery, when battery is low, this instrument will turn off
automatically.








7
Warranty
































Limited Warranty. GS Instrument product is warranted against defects in material
and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of shipment. During the
warranty period, GS Instrument Company will, at its option, either repair or replace
products that prove to be defective.
Below is the limitation of warranty per this manual:
Buyer misuse, unauthorized modification or repair of product
Operating personnel use this instrument against specification.
Defect resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by buyers.
Defect is Caused by the environment such as fire, flood or earthquake.
Buyer installs substitute parts or performs any unauthorized circuit and/or
consumption good substitution.
Buye r operates instrument against the environmental specifications for this
instrument.

With the exception of the above articles, GS Instruments product is warranted for
initial purchaser.
If this instrument is resold the end-user, warranty is not transferred.
The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from outside the
environment and/or misuse.


8
Accessories






























Standard Option

Carrying case AC Adaptor
Carrying Strap
Coaxial Cable
RS-232 Cable
Power Cable Ear Phone
N-BNC
Adaptor
Ni-MH(Rechargeable
Battery) 6PCS
Users Manual
/GUI Sofware Guide
Antenna
GUI Software CD

9

1. Introduction
Overview....11
2. Features
Main features .12
3. Functions
RF Field Strength Analyzer...13
Frequency Counter..13
Specifications....14
4. Instrument overview
Front Panel....18
Rear Panel.20
Side Panel.21
Top Panel...22
5. Basic operation
Before Power On..23
Power On...24
Turn on Power of Instrument...25
Description of operation screen...26
Reception Mode...32
Sweep Mode.33
Set up Span...34
Frequency Input... 35
Adjust Screen Level..37
Run - Scanning....38
Marker...39
Power Meter46
Setting of attenuator.49
LCD Light...50
LCD Contrast.51
Buzzer ON/OFF...52
Table of contents


10
3201N/3290N USERS MANUAL
Save/Load..53
Frequency Counter..57
Power Source...59
Level Unit...60
Reset..61
Baud Rate..62
Connection for PC63
Auto Power64
Offset..65
Menu...66
System...70
6. Description of key operating
Run [GHz] .73
Mode [MHz] ..73
Sweep [kHz] .74
Marker [DEL] 74
No. 1 [Start/Stop] .75
No. 2 [Span] ..75
No. 3 [Level] .76
No. 4 [Single]...76
No. 5 [Multi]77
No. 6 [UNIT] ....77
No. 7 [LCD Light] .78
No. 8 [LCD CONT; LCD Contrast] 78
No. 9 [Attenuator] 79
No. 0 [system] ..79
Shift.80
Dot [Buzzer] ..80
Menu [Load] .81
Enter [Save] .81
Up/Down Keys and Knob Key82
Test Equipment Depot - 800. 517. 8431 - 99 Washingt on St reet Melrose, MA 02176
FAX 781. 665. 0780 - Test Equipment Depot . com

11

Overview
The Protek 3201N/3290N is handheld RF Field Strength Analyzer and it
is optimized to analyze a signal for the radio frequency equipment that is
increased for the use of frequency, gradually high-speeded, and
digitalized. The Protek 3201N/3290N has adopted synthesizer method
and has a wideband reception range of 100 kHz to 2,900 MHz. The
characteristic of frequency response of the Protek 3201N/3290N is
calculated by memorized calculation data, and so it enables the Protek
3201N/3290N to measure accurate level and make easy analysis for wide
range of frequency band.
The Protek 3201N/3290N provides various functions and user-friendly
interface which makes it easy for the user to check the location of the
antenna with simple handling. The Spectrum Analyzer is ideal for user to
test, install and maintain Mobile Telecommunications Systems, Cellular
and Cordless Phone, CB Paging, Paging Systems, Cable and Satellite
TV Systems as well as antenna site measurements and maintenance.
The Protek 3201N/3290N supports RS 232C serial communication and
has separate GUI software. So, user can control the Protek 3201N/3290N
easily after connecting the Protek 3201N/3290N with his personal
computer, and can utilize the analyzed data variously after converting or
saving numerical value or graph.


I ntroducti on


1?
3201N/3290N USERS MANUAL

Main features
100 kHz to 2,900 MHz measurement range(3201N:2,000MHz)
Frequency Spectrum Analyzing Function and Frequency
Counter Function
Measure and demodulates N-FM, W-FM, AM, SSB signals

Built-in 2 GHz Frequency Counter
Accurate Signal Level Measurement
Marker/delta Marker/Squelch Adjustment Function
PLL tuning system for precise frequency tuning
Built-in Speaker
192 Pixels X 192 Pixels Back Light LCD
Menu selection method for Function selection
RS-232C Interface
User-friendly Icon Display
Maintenance of Wireless Telecommunications Equipments
General Usage for Installation and Maintenance of
telecommunications Equipments
Installation and Maintenance of Cable
RFID Tag RF Strength Measurement
Jammer (for hospital, theater and military) Performance Test
Installation and Maintenance of Satellite Antenna
Detection of Tapping and Hidden Camera




Features

13

RF Field Strength Analyzer

Spectrum: Peak Search, Marker to Center, Channel Power
Function
Internal Attn.: The input range can be extended by internal Max
10 dB Attn. function.
Sweep Mode: Single Run, Free Run, Squelch Run Selectable
Squelch Function: The Squelch Level may be adjusted to any
value from the reference level to Full Scale.
Copy Function: The Copy Set mode allows the contents of the
Channels edit Setup and Data memories to be copied to an
external device. Data may also be written into these memories
from external device




Frequency Counter

Frequency range: 35 MHz to 2,900 MHz (3201N:2,000MHz)
No. of digits: 7 digits
Resolution: 1 kHz
Functions


14
3201N/3290N USERS MANUAL
Specifications
Frequency Range 100 kHz to 2,900 MHz (3201N:2,000MHz)
Resolution Min. 6.25 kHz (Multiple of 6.25kHz)
Accuracy TXO : : 3 PPM / Display : : 1.5 PPM
W-FM / N-FM
/ AM / SSB
Wide FM : Approx. 180 kHz @-6 dB
Narrow FM : Approx. 12.5 kHz @-6 dB
AM/SSB : Approx. 2.4 kHz @-6 dB
Step Range
NFM/AM/SSB : 1.2MHz
WFM : 1MHz(1~20MHz), 20MHz(20~400MM)
Span Range
AM, SSB, Narrow FM : 1MHz, 2MHz
Wide FM : 1~20MHz (Multiple of 1 MHz)
20~400MHz (Multiple of 20 MHz)
Frequency
Selection Mode
Center, Start/ Stop, Span
Measurement
Range
-45 dBm to 110 dBm
Average noise
Level
WFM/AM/SSB : -100dBM
NFM : -110 dBm
Amplitude Units dBm, dBmV, dBuV
Reference Level
Accuracy
Typical 2.0 dB (@20~30/W-FM)
Typical 2.0 dB (@25/N-FM/AM/SSB)
Reference Level
Range
0 ~ -80dBm
Log Scale
0.2 dB/DIV min, in 0.25 dB Span (5 Display
Division)
10 dB (Default, 10dB Auto Atten.)
Internal Attn
Accuracy
1.0 dB (@25 )
Frequency
Amplitude
Internal Attn
(Manual/Auto)

15
Specifications
asdf
Type Mono STN LCD
Display Resolution 192 Pixels X 192 Pixels
LCD Light On / Off
Frequency Range
35MHz to 2,900MHz
(3201N:35~2,000MHz)
Resolution 7 Digits
Accuracy :50 PPM :1 COUNT
Sampling Time 1 sec
Input Sensitivity
35 MHz to 2,000 MHz : 150 mVrms
20 MHz to 1,000 MHz : 100 mVrms
2,000 MHz to 2,900 MHz : 400 mVrms
(for 3290N)
Input Impedance 50 Ohms
Max. Input Voltage 5 Vrms Max.
Speed Min. 500 msec
Trigger Source Narrow FM / Wide FM / AM / SSB
Trigger Mode
Free Run / Single Run / Continuous Wave
/ Squelch Run
Trigger Level TTL Level
Marker Mode Maker / Delta Maker
Trace & Setup
Storage
Max 100 Waveforms and 100 States
Sweep
Memory
Display
Frequency
Counter


16
3201N/3290N USERS MANUAL
Specifications















A

RF Input Connector N type Female, 50 Ohms
Max Input Level Max. +10 dBm, 5Vrms
Operating
Temperature
0 to 40
Humidity 35 RH to 85 RHP
Storage Temp. 10 to 50
Battery Power
Source
AA Type Ni-MH Rechargeable Battery 6
PCS
Battery
Specification
AA Type 1.2 V, 2,700 mAh Rechargeable
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery
Adapter
SMPS Type AC Adapter (DC 12 V Output)
Car-Adapter (DC 12 V Output)
Auto Power On/Off
Off/ 5 min./ 10 min./ 20 min./30 min.
The Protek 3201N/3290N can be quickly recharged using a Ni-
MH Rechargeable Battery. The Recharged method of Ni-MH
Battery is controlled by the voltage of Battery Cell and the
temperature of Battery. The external temperature of Ni-MH
Rechargeable Battery is gradually increased and then quickly
increased in some point of time. The Protek 3201N/3290N
closes charging quickly after checking the increased amount
(dT/dt) of external temperature of Battery for a unit time. Also, for
Battery protection, the recharging is compulsory closed by built-
in temperature sensor in case that the voltage of Battery Cell will
be increased to more than some specified level or the external
temperature of Battery will be going up to over 50 . For safe
usage, it is strongly recommended to use Ni-MH Rechargeable
battery, and please do not use in the place with high temperature
or high humidity during recharging.
Spectrum
input Port
Operation
Environment
Power
Source

17
Specifications































Dimension 4 (W)9 (H)1.8 (D)
Weight
Approx. 0.66 Kg(1.45 lbm)
(including Antenna, except Battery)
Antenna (Receive Only), SMPS Type AC Adapter, Fuji-AA type NI-MH
Rechargeable Battery (6 PCS, 1.2 V 2,700 mAh), Manual, Coaxial
Cable, Earphone, Carrying Case, Carrying Belt, RS-232C Cable,
Adapter(N-BNC), Software for PC Application
Matching Pad (75 Ohms to 50 Ohms), F-BNC Adapter, Car Adapter,
Block Voltage Unit
Physical
Specifications
Standard
Accessories
Optional
Accessories


18
3201N/3290N USERS MANUAL

Front Panel


























The LCD screen can display the signal input level, frequency and
amplitude values, and the relative system data


Power Key
Key to turn ON/OFF the system

Run / Mode / Sweep / Marker Key

Run
Key to run the Scanning or input the GHz unit for frequency value
input


Instrument overview
LCD
Front Figure
Key Pad
3290N 2.9GHz RF FIELD STRENGTH ANALYZER

19
Front Panel
Mode
Key to set up the Reception Mode or input the MHz unit for
frequency value input

Sweep
Key to set up the Sweep Mode or input the kHz unit for frequency
value input

Marker
Key to select the Marker Function:
Marker, Delta Marker, Squelch Marker, Peak Search, Marker to
Center, and Channel Power

Numeric Key
Key to input the frequency value

Menu Key
Key to set up the required functions of system

Up/Down Key
Key to select the Menu or Frequency Value

Knob Key
The function of Knob key is same as the Up/Down keys



?0
3201N/3290N USERS MANUAL
Rear Panel





























Belt Clip
User can yoke the Protek 3201N/3290N on a belt.

Speaker
User can use the speaker to output the modulated audio from RF
signal level.

Reset Key
User can use this Reset key from systems malfunction or memory
reset.

Battery
Note the polarity of batteries at inserted battery compartment. And
user must use the AA type Ni-MH Rechargeable batteries for battery
charging
Rear Figure
Test Equipment Depot - 800. 517. 8431 - 99 Washingt on St reet Melrose, MA 02176
FAX 781. 665. 0780 - Test Equipment Depot . com

?1
Side Panel





























DC Input Jack
User can use this DC input jack for power supply and battery
charging with SMPS type AC/DC Adapter or Car Adapter.

RS-232C Connector (8 pin mini DIN connector)
User can use this RS-232C connector for PC communication with
serial cable.
Side Figure
RS 232C
EXT DC


??
3201N/3290N USERS MANUAL
Top Panel
















Input Connector for Signal Level
User can connect the antenna or coaxial cable to this connector on
the system. The maximum input voltage is 5 Vrms.

Input Connector for Frequency Counter
User can connect the signal source to be measured to this connector.
The maximum input voltage is 5 Vrms.

Volume Control
User can control the volume of audio output. To increase the volume
of audio output, turn the Volume Control to clockwise direction.

Earphone Jack
Top Figure
VOL
EAR
COUNTER ANT
5V RMS 5V RMS

?3

Before Power ON
How to insert and charge the AA Type Ni-MH rechargeable batteries?
For the insertion of batteries, please release the screw on the battery
cover on the bottom of the instrument. And put in AA Type Ni-MH
rechargeable batteries (Total 6 PCS).

To charge the batteries after inserting batteries, connect the DC cable
plug of SMPS type adaptor to DC jack of system (DC output: 12V).
Battery charging will begin after DC cable in connected.
At this time, if user turns on the power of system, the battery icon on
the display window is displayed and blinking. And if the charging of
batteries is finished, the blanking of battery icon will stop and only be
displayed.



To measure the input level of RF signal, connect the antenna or
coaxial cable to N-type connector of system (marked ANT)

Input Connector for RF Signal Level:
User can connect the antenna or coaxial cable to this connector on
the system. The maximum input voltage is 5 Vrms

Input Connector for Frequency Counter:
User can connect the signal source to be measured to this
connector. The maximum input voltage is 5 Vrms.

Basic operation
Connection
for Input
Level


?4
3201N/3290N USERS MANUAL
Power ON
To turn on the system power, Press the key.
The system power is ON. The last displayed screen from the previous
usage will be displayed (Previous setup status).

This system supports the simple manipulation with frequently used
function keys. To use this simple manipulation, push the key and
push the numerical key. The frequently used function is marked on the
numerical key below.
The upper right icons are the basic , mode and the
mode.
User can select the shift mode or basic , mode by prssing
the key.

If the LCD screen is not readily visible, user can adjust the LCD
contrast to see LCD screen.


To adjust the LCD contrast, push the key. And push the No. 8
(LCD Contrast) key. Until users desired LCD contrast is adjusted,
use the Up/Down keys and Knob key.

To turn on the LCD light, push the key. And push the No. 7 (LCD
Light) key. Then the LCD light is turned on.
And to turn off the LCD light, push the key. And push the No. 7
(LCD Light) key (Toggle ON/OFF).

For the LCD display, refer to below figure.

?5
Turn on power of instrument

STEP 1
- Push the Key.

STEP 2 Adusl lo LCD Conlrasl)
- Push the Key.
- Push the LCD CONTRAST (No.8) Key.
- Adjust to desired LCD Contrast using the Up/Down Keys
or Knob Key.

STEP 3
- Push the Dot Key and will be taken out of Menu.
STEP 4 LCD Liqhl OniO)
- Push the Shift Key

STEP 5
- Push the No. 7 (LCD Light) Key

Power On

?7
Description of operating screen
Shift State Indication
, Normal state
Shift Input state


] Reception Mode State Indication
Wide Frequency Multi Mode
Narrow Frequency Multi Mode
Amplitude Modulation Mode
Single side band Multi Mode



[ Sweep Mode State Indication
Free Run
Squelch Run
Single Run


( Run-Scanning Run/Stop State Indication
Running
Stop


( Marker State Indication
None Center Marker State
Marker 1 State
Delta Marker State Marker 1, 2
Squelch Marker State

Icons are changed
by shift key
Icons are changed
by Mode key
Icons are changed
by Sweep key
Icons are changed
by Run key
Icons are changed
by Marker key


?8
3201N/3290N USERS MANUAL
Description of operating screen
Buzzer On/off Indication
Buzzer Off
Buzzer On


Battery Residual Indication
Full
Empty











Frequency Value Indication


LEVEL


ATTN


2. Frequency
Input
window
Icons are changed by
Dot(Buzzer) key

?9
Description of operating scene
Center Frequency Indication NONE
Maker 1 Frequency Indication
Maker 2 Frequency Indication
Frequency Counter Value Indication
- Indication of Frequency Value of each Mode

] Level Value Indication
Indication of Level Value of each Mode..

Level Unit
Can be established in Menu.
[Please refer to Menu Level Unit establishment for further details]

( Atten. Establish Value
Indicate established Atten. Value.
(Internal + External Atten. Value) [Please refer to Menu Level Unit
establishment for further details]

( Frequency Unit
Every Frequency Unit is indicated in MHz


30
3201N/3290N USERS MANUAL
Description of operating screen











Indication Reference
Value of Screen
Level Value
]
Resolution of Screen
Level Value
Indication to Vertical Level Value of
Wavy pattern window.
[Please refer to Screen Level
establishment in Basic operation
Explanation for further details]
Marker Indication

Center
Marker

Marker 1
[

Marker 2
Every Marker can control the
Up/Down keys or Knob
Key.

3. Wavy
pattern
window

Test Equipment Depot - 800. 517. 8431 - 99 Washingt on St reet Melrose, MA 02176
FAX 781. 665. 0780 - Test Equipment Depot . com

31
Description of operating screen





Center Marker, Marker 1, When Squelch Marker
CENT Center Frequency
SPAN Span Frequency
STEP Step Frequency
MHz

When Delta Marker ]
MKR1 Marker 1 Frequency MHz
LEV1 Marker 2 Level Value
DIFF
Marker1- Marker2 Level Value
dBm
4. Marker
Window


3?
3201N/3290N USERS MANUAL
Reception Mode
Reception Mode is total (4) fourth mode as Demodulation when will
receive.
Wide Frequency Modulation
Wide-FM
Wide FM RBW(Resolution Bandwidth ) 180 kHz
Narrow Frequency Modulation
Narrow-FM
Narrow RBW(Resolution Bandwidth ) 12.5 kHz
Amplitude Modulation
AM
SSB /AM RBW(Resolution Bandwidth ) 2.4 kHz
Single Side Band Modulation
SSB
SSB /AM RBW(Resolution Bandwidth ) 2.4 kHz

Wide FM should be used to interpret a large Signal of Band width,
Narrow FM should be used to interpret a narrow Bandwidth Signal. AM
and SSB can used irrespective of Bandwidth.
Push Mode (MHz) Key to establish the reception mode and then
the top-left ICON will be changed to WFM , NFM , AM
, SSB order. When inputting Frequency like Start/Stop,
Span etc, the Mode (MHz) Key is used.
RBW is fixed in each Mode as follows.

Wide FM RBW (Resolution Bandwidth) 180 kHz
Narrow RBW (Resolution Bandwidth) 12.5 kHz
SSB/AM RBW (Resolution Bandwidth) 2.4 kHz

STEP 1
- Push the Mode (MHz) Key.

STEP 2
- Push the Mode (MHz) Key and t the top left ICON will change
to WFM , NFM , AM and SSB
order.
Reception
Mode
Establishment

33
Sweep Mode
Sweep Mode is used to set up operation characters which interpret Input.
Every each operation character is same as follows.








Establish this mode by pushing the Sweep (kHz) Key and then
the top left ICON will be changed to FREE Run , SQUELCH Run
and SINGLE Run order. The Sweep (kHz) Key is
used as input Start/Stop, Span and Input Frequency Unit into kHz Unit.
After input is finished Frequency, FREE Run continues to execute
Run-Scanning operation automatically.
Squelch Run operation will stop Run-Scanning in case of Signal
Level Value is getting higher than Squelch Level Value. But, If Signal Level
is getting lower than Squelch Level, restart to Run- Scanning.
After input is finished Start/Stop Frequency, Single Run execute
Run-Scanning just a once. In addition, if it is desired to Run-Scanning,
push the Run (GHz) Key and then execute Run-Scanning once


STEP 1
- Push the Sweep (kHz) Key

STEP 2
- Push the Sweep (kHz) Key, and the top-left ICON will be
changed to FREE Run, SQUELCH Run and SINGLE
Run order.
Free Run
Analyzing execution consecutively
Single Run
Only 1 time Execution
Squelch Run
Run by higher than Squelch level
(Similar Trigger Mode of Oscilloscope)
Sweep
Mode
Establishment


34
3201N/3290N USERS MANUAL
Set up Span
The span is able to be set 1MHz to 400MHz. It has two settings 1MHz
step up to 20MHz and 20MHz step from 20MHz to 400MHz. If other
numeral keys than MHz unit key is pushed, the input unit will be set to the
nearest times by rising automatically.

Ex 1) When span input is 9.25Mhz, span will be 10MHz.
Ex 2) When span input is 48MHz, span will be 60MHz.

First, push the Shift Key (Shift icon is upside-down) in order to set
up Span. The top-left ICON is changed , to .

After that, push the No. Key. So then Frequency Input window changes
the Span Input State.

Enter the Input Frequency and then input the Unit to use for this Run
(GHz) , Mode(MHz) or Sweep (kHz) Key would be set
up Span.
Regardless of Frequency Input State, upper Keys are only used the input
units.



STEP 1
- Push the Shift Key

STEP 2
- Push the No. 2 Key
- When the Sweep (kHz) Key is pressed, the top-left ICON is
changed to FREE Run, SQUELCH Run and
SINGLE Run order.


Set up
Span Mode

35
Frequency Input
Chosen Reception Mode, Sweep Mode and Span are showed on the top
center of LCD. At first, choose Reception Mode and Sweep Mode to get a
sense of the Frequency Bandwidth and a specific feel for analyzing.

Choosing Frequency Value is a way to inputting Center and Start/Stop
Frequency.
To order to input Center Frequency just pushes the numeral keys.
Press the key when Frequency Input Window is a CENT state.

Push the Shift Key to input Start/Stop Frequency.
Push the Shift Key to input Frequency you would like to analyze.
Push the No. 1(Start/Stop) Key, to inputted Start Frequency in
Frequency Input Window.
Input Frequency by using the No. 0 to 9 Keys, Dot
(Buzzer) Key, MARKER (DEL) Key and Run (GHz)
as Unit Input Key, Mode (MHz) and SWEEP (kHz) Key.

Execution will be done automatically, after inputting the last Unit in the
Frequency, according to a given Sweep Mode of Run-Scanning Mode. If
the mode is Single Run , push the Run (GHz) Key and then
execute Run-Scanning again.

A wrong inputting content can be erased by using the MARKER (DEL)
Key. The MARKER (DEL) Key operates like the Back
space on PC


Inputting Frequency in out of Frequency Input Mode:
Frequencies can be deleted by pushing the MARKER (DEL) Key
several times.
Erase inputted Frequency and then push the Marker (DEL) Key one
more time, you are now out of Frequency Input Mode.


37
Adjust screen Level
Settle Top Level- Reference Level and Level Resolution to be Display on
scene.

RLEV is an abbreviation of Reference Level.
Choose through the Up/Down Keys and establish to use the
Enter Key. Top Level in verticality axis would be changed
established Value.

DIFF is an abbreviation of Difference.
Choose through the Up/Down Keys and establish to use the
Enter Key. Level Step in verticality axis would be changed
established Value
RLEV
Choose through the Up/Down Keys and push
the Enter Key.
DIFF
Choose through the Up/Down Keys and push
the Enter Key.













DIFF


38
3201N/3290N USERS MANUAL
Run-Scanning

Run-Scanning is a process interpreting Frequency according to
established Frequency Bandwidth and Span. And Run- scanning
processes operate by establishing Sweep Mode




Run-Scanning process would be accomplished by establishing
Reception Mode and Sweep Mode (See above)


39
Marker
Protek 3201N/3290N has Center Marker, Marker 1, Delta Marker (Marker1
and Marker2) and Squelch Marker. Each Marker Mode can define a state of
Marker ICON into the top-left Marker Mode ICON.


Marker Mode
ICON
Marker ICON
Center Marker
No ICON

Marker 1


You can settle Marker 1 in this
state.
Marker 2

You can settle Marker 2 in this
state.
Squelch Marker


Fix the volume when listening by
making a multiple Signal to audible
Frequency Bandwidth to use
FM/AM/SSB and then fix Basic
Signal of Squelch Run.


40
3201N/3290N USERS MANUAL
Marker


Center Marker is not a Mode the user will choose when using Mark Mode
in Basic operation. When inputting Start Frequency and Stop Frequency,
Center Frequency information will appear automatically.
The state is not indicated on the Mode ICON is Center Mode.
Frequency and Level on Center Frequency will be indicated on
Frequency Input Window.
Center
Marker
Test Equipment Depot - 800. 517. 8431 - 99 Washingt on St reet Melrose, MA 02176
FAX 781. 665. 0780 - Test Equipment Depot . com

41
Marker


To use Marker 1 , press the Marker(DEL) key in
Center Marker status. When it turns to Marker 1 mode, Marker mode icon
is changed to . And frequency input window is changed to Center
Marker to Marker 1 .
To move the Marker 1, use the Up/Down keys, or the Knob
key. Then the frequency value and level value are displayed on
frequency input window

STEP 1
- Press the Marker (DEL) Key.
- Check the Marker 1 mode in display window

STEP 2
- To move the Marker 1 to wanted plot point, please use the Up/Down
keys, or Knob key.
- Then the frequency value and level value are displayed in the frequency
input window
Marker 1


4?
3201N/3290N USERS MANUAL
Marker














Press the Marker (DEL) Key until the Marker mode icon is
changed to Delta Marker in the display window. And in this case,
Marker 2 is added.
The Marker mode is the total four modes. And the changed order of
Marker mode is as below:
Center Marker 1 Delta Maker Squelch Marker





When user set up the Delta Marker, the frequency value and level value
of Marker 2 are displayed in the frequency input window. The frequency
value and level value of Marker 1, and the difference level value between
Marker 1 and Marker 2 are displayed in the Marker window

Delta Marker
To handle the Marker 1, user can set up the marker 1 in Marker mode 1
To handle the Marker 2, user can set up the marker 2 in Delta Marker

43
Marker
STEP 1
- Press the Marker (DEL) Key.
- Check the Delta Marker mode in the display window

STEP 2
- To move the Marker 1 to wanted plot point, please use the Up/Down
keys, or Knob key.
- Then, the frequency value and level value of Marker 2 are displayed in
the frequency input window.
The frequency value and level value of Marker 1, and the difference
level value between Marker 1 and Marker 2 are displayed in the Marker
window. Then the frequency value and level value are displayed in the
frequency input window


44
3201N/3290N USERS MANUAL
Marker

To know the magnitude of frequency, user can use the Squelch Marker.
And the Squelch Marker is the right Marker on the vertical axis of the
display window.

Also, user can set up the Squelch Marker for setting the Squelch Level of
Sweep mode and speaker output for a larger signal than Squelch Level
through modulation for audio frequency range. (Modulation: Frequency
modulation, Amplitude modulation, and SSB Modulation)
User can hear the radio using upper method.

Press the Marker (DEL) Key until the Marker mode icon is
changed to the Squelch Marker in the display window.
Squelch
Marker

45
Marker
STEP 1
- Press the Marker key.
- Check the Squelch Marker mode.

STEP 2
- Move the Squelch Marker to wanted point using the Up/Down
Keys or Knob Key.
- The squelch value is displayed in the lower right display window.







46
3201N/3290N USERS MANUAL
Power Meter

To use the Single Power Meter Function, at first push the Shift
and then check the icon that is changed.
Please push the numeral 4(Single) key. After inputting the frequency to
measure, input the unit.

STEP 1
- Push the Shift Key.

STEP 2
- Push the NO.4(SINGLE) Key.

STEP 3
- Input the frequency to measure..

STEP 4
- Input the units using RUN , Mode and Sweep keys.


Single Power
Meter
Function

47
Power Meter

To use the Multi Power Meter Function, at first push the Shift key
and then check the icon that is changed.
Please push the No. 5(MULTI) key. Assign any number of frequencies
to measure within 1 to 9. After inputting the frequency to measure, input
the unit.
STEP 1
- Push the Shift Key.

STEP 2
- Push the No.5 (MULTI) key.

STEP 3
- Input a number within 1 to 9

STEP 4
- Input frequency to measure.

STEP 5
- Input the units using RUN , Mode and Sweep keys.

Multi Power
Meter
Fuction


48
3201N/3290N USERS MANUAL
UNIT












STEP 1
- Push the Shift Key.

STEP 2
- Push the No.6 (UNIT) key.

STEP 3
- Using the Up/Down Key or knob key, move to the
measuring unit and then set up by Enter key.
UNIT
Change
Function

49
Setting of Attenuator
The internal attenuator is used for maximum input signal -45dBm with
Menu function.
To set the internal attenuator, press the Shift key to change the
upper right icon , to .
And press the No. 9 (ATTN) key.
To adjust the value of internal attenuator, press the Up/Down
Keys or rotate the Knob key. And Press the Enter key.

If the input signal is larger than -20dBm (ex. -10dBm, 0dBm, and etc), user
can use the users external attenuator.

Setting of the EXT. ATTEN. is as below
Push the No. 9(ATTN) key.
INT. ATTEN in system is set up. Push the Dot key and then move
the previous menu. After selecting the EXT ATTEN using the Up/Down
Keys or rotate the Knob key, push the Enter key.
After selecting requested ATTEN using the Up/Down Keys or
rotate the Knob key, push the Enter key
Setting for
Internal or
External
Attenuator


50
3201N/3290N USERS MANUAL
LCD Light
The LCD Light is designed to ease the use of the instrument in a dark
location.
Press the Shift key to change the upper right icon , to
.
And press the No. 7 (LCD Light) key.
*The Power ON/OFF of the LCD Light is toggle

STEP 1
- Press the Shift key

STEP 2
- Press the No. 7 (LCD Light) key





If the LCD light is ON, the current of battery is relatively
larger than when LCD light OFF. In other words using time of
system is shorter
Test Equipment Depot - 800. 517. 8431 - 99 Washingt on St reet Melrose, MA 02176
FAX 781. 665. 0780 - Test Equipment Depot . com

51
LCD Contrast









The function of LCD contrast is to adjust the contrast for the remained
battery capacity.
Push the Shift key to change the upper right icon , to
.
And push the No. 8 (LCD Contrast) key.
The LCD contrast is adjusted by using the Up/Down keys or
Knob key. And push the Enter key.


STEP 1
- Press the Shift key

STEP 2
- Press the No. 8 (LCD Contrast) key

STEP 3
- To adjust the LCD contrast, use the Up/Down keys or Knob
key and press the Enter key


5?
3201N/3290N USERS MANUAL
Buzzer ON/OFF
User can set the Buzzer ON/OFF (Toggle ON/OFF)
Push the Shift Key. Then the Icon , of left upper
window is changed to shift icon .
And press the Dot Key.

And press the Dot Key.

STEP 1
- Press the Shift key

STEP 2
- Press the Dot Key

53
Save/Load
The function of Save/Load is for the Waveform and Setup Statuses.

The function of Save is for concurrently saving the Waveform and Setup
Status in memory.
And the saved Setup Status in memory includes the following information:
Reception mode, Sweep mode, Frequency range, Step value, and Span
value. User can use this with Menu or Multi key.

The function of Load is for loading the saved Waveform and Setup Status
in memory.
If user only wants the Setup Status, please load the saved file for desired
Setup Status. And press the Run key. Then this measuring instrument will
complete the Run-scanning operation. User can only use this in Menu.

The function of Delete is for deleting the saved file. Also User can only use
this in the Menu.

Save


54
3201N/3290N USERS MANUAL
Save/Load
STEP 1
- Press the Shift key

STEP 2
- Press the Enter key

STEP 3
- To save the waveform or setup status, a name with at least 7 characters
is required.
- To select the first character. Use the Up/Down keys. And
press the Enter key
- If want to save the file name fewer than 10 characters, press the END
on stated inputted file name.

STEP 4
- To delete the character, press the Marker key

STEP 5
- When all 7 characters included blank are typed, press the Enter
key. Then, output message for SAVE OK is displayed.
SAVE OK
- If user does not type the all 7 characters included blank, the function of
save is not completed

STEP 6
- To cancel the Save, press the Marker key until the first character
is deleted. And additionally press the Marker key one time.
- Then the Save is canceled and the output message is displayed as
below.
SAVE FAILED
- The values to be saved are signal and system setting values. Buzzer,
LCD contrast and LCD light states are not saved.

55
Save/Load













STEP 1
- Press the Shift key

STEP 2
- Press the Enter key

STEP 3
- To save the waveform or setup status, a name with at least 7 characters
is required.
- To select the first character. Use the Up/Down keys. And
press the Enter key


The function of Load is to load the saved waveform and setup status.
If user only wants to load only setup status, load the users saved data
and press the Run key.
Then system will run in loading setup status. (Run-scanning)

Load


56
3201N/3290N USERS MANUAL
Save/Load













STEP 1
- Press the Menu key

STEP 2
- To select the DELETE, use the Up/Down keys or Knob
key and press the Enter key

STEP 3
- To delete the saved data, select the users saved data using the
Up/Down keys or Knob key. And press the Enter
key. Then the saved data will be deleted

Delete

57
Frequency Counter












Select the F.counter under Main Menu function
The input connector for the frequency counter is BNC connector.
When the input level is inputted into the Frequency Counter, the
measured frequency value is displayed in the frequency input window


Input level is same as below.
35 MHz to 2,000 MHz : 150m Vrms
20 MHz to 1,000 MHz : 100m Vrms
2,000 MHz to 2,900 MHz : 400m Vrms



58
3201N/3290N USERS MANUAL
Frequency Counter
STEP 1
- Press the Menu key

STEP 2
- To select the FUCTION, use the Up/Down keys or Knob
key and press the Enter key.
- Then sub menu is opened.

STEP 3
- To select the F. COUNTER (Frequency Counter), use the Up/Down
keys or Knob key and press the Enter key

STEP 4
- The icon is displayed from the other icon.
The FCNT is displayed in the frequency input window

STEP 5
- When the input level is inputted in the Frequency Counter using BNC
connector, the measured frequency value is displayed in the frequency
input window

STEP 6
- To change the Frequency Counter mode to Spectrum mode, run the
upper Step 1 to Step 3. At this time, select the SPECTRUM not F.
COUNTER in Step 3


59
Power Source
To check the batterys remained capacity Battery, user can refer to the
battery icon in the upper area of display window



How to use and replace the battery
The power system of Protek 7830 uses the Ni-MH rechargeable
batteries. Then, the power system supports fast charging. The charger
for the Ni-MH batteries is controlled by the voltage and temperature of
the battery cells.

The Ni-MH rechargeable batteries must be used for the safe and stable
power source. And if the charging is required, please avoid the site with
high temperature or high humidity

Checking
for Battery


60
3201N/3290N USERS MANUAL
Level Unit
The setting for level unit can be set up in the Menu.
The level unit can be set up as below
dBm
dBuV
dBmV

STEP 1
- Push the Menu key

STEP 2
- To select the LEVEL UNIT, use the Up/Down keys or Knob
key and push the Enter key.
Then sub menu is opened.

STEP 3
- To select the users wanted level unit, use the Up/Down keys
or Knob key and push the Enter key
Setting of
the Unit
Test Equipment Depot - 800. 517. 8431 - 99 Washingt on St reet Melrose, MA 02176
FAX 781. 665. 0780 - Test Equipment Depot . com

61
Reset
The function of Reset is for initializing the memory or system.
The three kinds of resets are supported. And these resets are run
through the Menu

Preset
System Reboot for initial setup status.
(Center Frequency, Span Frequency, Marker and etc)

Memory CLR
The users saved data will be cleared. (Memory Cleared)

System INIT
The upper two resets (PRESET and MEMORY CLR) are run.
Then, system reboot for initial setup status and the users saved data will
be cleared


STEP 1
- Push the Menu key

STEP 2
- To select the RESET, use the Up/Down keys or Knob
key and push the Enter key.
- Then, sub menu is opened.

STEP 3
- To run the wanted Reset, use the Up/Down keys or Knob
key and push the Enter key.
- Then, the selected reset will be run


6?
3201N/3290N USERS MANUAL
Baud Rate
The setting of the baud rate is for the transmission speed.
The Baud Rate between PC and system is same as below.









STEP 1
- Push the Menu key

STEP 2
- To select the BAUD RATE, use the Up/Down keys or Knob
key and push the Enter key.
Then, sub menu is opened.

STEP 3
- To select the wanted baud rate value, use the Up/Down keys
or Knob key and push the Enter key

115,200 BPS (Default)
57,600 BPS
38,400 BPS
19,200 BPS
9,600 BPS
4,800 BPS
Setting of
the Baud
Rate

63
Connection for PC
The function of CONNECT PC is for connecting to a PC.
First, the GUI program is run on the PC. And the serial cable is connected
between PC and Protek 7830.
Next, run the REMOTE PC from Menu.

NONE
REMOTE PC


STEP 1
- Press the Menu key

STEP 2
- To select the CONNECT PC, use the Up/Down keys or Knob
key and press the Enter key.
Then, sub menu is opened.

STEP 3
- To select the REMOTE PC, use the Up/Down keys or Knob
key and press the Enter key.
Then, the connection between the PC and the system is running.
Setting of
the
Connection
for PC


64
3201N/3290N USERS MANUAL
Auto Power
The Auto Power function should be used to conserve system power.
When the power OFF time is enabled (NONE is not selected), the
power source will be turned off automatically if the user dose not use the
system for the auto power OFF period of time.

The auto power OFF time is same as below
NONE
05MINUTES
10MINUTES
20MINUTES
30MINUTES


STEP 1
- Push the Menu key twice

STEP 2
- To select the AUTO POWER, use the Up/Down keys or Knob
key and push the Enter key.
Then, sub menu is opened.

STEP 3
- To select the auto power time, use the Up/Down keys or
Knob key and push the Enter key


65
Offset
Level Offset compensates for any loss due to the cabling.
Offset adds the value of +Offset to all values of measurement.


STEP 1
- Press the Menu key twice

STEP 2
- Move the cursor on PC Connect using the Up/Down Keys or
knob Key.

STEP 3
- Push the Enter Key and then move the submenu.
- Move the dB value of Offset.
- Push the Enter Key

STEP 4
- Push the Menu Key one more time to exit the System




66
3201N/3290N USERS MANUAL
Menu









There are two modes. One is Multi key function with the Shift Key
and the other is to select other functions.
It can select the functions using multi key and in Menu.
The functions that could be selected in Menu mode is as blow








To exit from Menu or System, push the Menu Key or push the Dot
key. These keys will move through the menu either lower or higher.
Level Unit
Reset
Band Rate
Connect PC

67
Menu
STEP 1
- Push the Menu key twice

STEP 2
- To select wanted function, use the Up/Down Keys or the
Knob Key.

STEP 3
- Push the Enter Key

STEP 4
- After selecting function of lower item or On/Off, push the Enter
Key

STEP 5
- Exit the Menu after pushing the Menu Key twice.
- When the Menu Key is pushed one time, you are in System


68
3201N/3290N USERS MANUAL
Menu
Spectrum
Frequency Counter
TEST Mode
Single Power Meter
Function
Multi Power Meter
Set up the functions of
Spectrum and frequency
counter.
N-FM
W-FM
SSB
Reception
Mode
AM
Set up the Reception
Mode.
Its possible to set up with
the Shift Key (Shift
button is upside-down
please check all buttons to
confirm they are correct.)
Free Run
Squelch Run
Sweep
Mode
Single Run
Set up the Sweep Mode.
It could be set up with the
Shift Key.
None
Marker
Delta MKR
Marker
Squelch MKR
Marker or function using
the Marker.
The mode can be set up
with the Shift Key.
Save Save Data
The mode can be set up
with the Shift Key.
Load Load Data
The mode can be set up
with the Shift Key.
dBm
dBuV Level Unit
dBmV



69
Menu

















Pre Reset
Restarting the System and
clear all parameters for set up
Memory CLR
Delete the stored data
Reset
System INI
All Reset restarting the
system and delete the stored
data
115,200 BPS
57,600 BPS
38,400 BPS
19,200 BPS
9,600 BPS
Band Rate
4,800 BPS
Select the speed of serial
communication between the
unit and PC
None
Connect
PC
Remote PC
Select the connection to PC


70
3201N/3290N USERS MANUAL
System














There are modes that select the function of Multi key using the Shift
Key and the other functions.
Functions can be selected using the multi key and the Menu.
The functions that can be selected in Menu mode are as blow.
To exit from Menu or System, push the Key or push the Dot key,
this will move you to lower menu items or to higher menu items.

Test Equipment Depot - 800. 517. 8431 - 99 Washingt on St reet Melrose, MA 02176
FAX 781. 665. 0780 - Test Equipment Depot . com

71
System
STEP 1
- Press the Menu Key

STEP 2
- Press the Menu Key once more.

STEP 3
- To select desired function, use the Up/Down Keys or the
Knob Key

STEP 4
- Press the Enter Key

STEP 5
- After selecting a lower item function or On/Off, push the Enter Key

STEP 6
- Push the Menu Key once to exit the System




7?
3201N/3290N USERS MANUAL
System

























None
05 Minutes
10 Minutes
20 Minutes
Auto Power
30 Minutes
Select auto power saving
mode.
ON
Buzzer
OFF
Select Buzzer On/Off.
It could be set up with the Shift
Key (Shift Key Icon is
upside down. Please check all
icons to fix this.)
ON
LCD Light
OFF
Select LCD Light On/Off.
It could be set up with the Shift
Key.
LCD Contrast 1 to 10 Step

0 dB
10 dB
20 dB
30 dB
INT. Atten.
35 dB


EXT. Atten. 0 dB to 90 dB
Offset -99.0 dB to 99.0 dB
Default save SAVE
During booting,
save default value to be
applied.

When Saving the values, all
values will be saved except
Signal.

73

Run [GHz]
Instruction to start scanning frequencies
After power on, this button will work as it did under the most
recent setup, or when Squelch Run or Single Run
functions are active.

[Please refer to the Scan in description of basic operation details if
needed]

Units input function can be used to set up Start/ Stop/ Scan/
Center frequencies.
After inputting the frequency values, push the k GHz key to view the
units.

Mode [MHz]
Selecting Reception Mode
The following Reception Modes can be selected WFM ,
NFM ,AM and SSB .
[Please refer to the Reception Mode section for detailed
description of basic operation.]

Units can be entered when setting up Start/Stop/Scan/Center
frequencies.
Push the MHz key after inputting the frequencies to view the values.
Description of key operating


74
3201N/3290N USERS MANUAL
Sweep [kHz]
Selecting Sweep Mode
This button selects the Sweep Mode such as FREE Run ,
SQUELCH Run and SINGLE Run

[Please refer to the Sweep Mode section for a detailed description of
basic operation.]

The units input function can be used to set up Start/ Stop/
Scan/ Center frequencies.
After input the value of frequency, push the key of kHz for the units its.



Marker [DEL]
Selecting Marker functions.
After pushing this button, please select Marker functions such as Center
Marker, Marker 1, Delta Marker and Squelch Marker.

[Please refer to the Marker section for a description of basic operation
for more detail.]

This is the Delete function when setting up Start/Stop/Scan/Center
frequencies.
When inputting the frequency values, the Marker Key can be
used as the Delete Key.

This key functions as a backspace key on a PC.

75
No. 1 [Start/Stop]
Press the No. 1 key to input the value of 1.
To input the value of numeral 1 in the Start/Stop/Scan/Center
frequencies, please use the No. 1 Key.

Pressing No, 1 key and the Shift Key will active the
Input function for Start/Stop Mode.
Select the Start/Stop Mode by pushing the Shift Key and than
push the numeral Key.

[Please refer to the Frequency Input section for a description of basic
operation if more detail is needed.].


No. 2 [Span]
Press the No. 2 key to input the value of 2.
Input the value of numeral 2 in the Start/Stop/Scan/Center Mode by
pressing the No. 2 Key.

Span Frequency Input function can be activated by pushing
Shift Key
By pushing the Shift Key and than pushing the No. 2 Key,
the Span Mode can be activated.

[Please refer to the Span section for a detailed description of basic
operation if required.]


76
3201N/3290N USERS MANUAL
No. 3 [Level]
Push the No. 3 key to input the value of 3.
In order to input the value of numeral 3 in the Start/Stop/Scan/Center
frequencies, push the No. 3 Key.

Display Level Adjustment Function by pushing Shift
Key.
On pushing the Shift Key and then push the No. 3 Key,
Basic Level of vertical axis and Level Step on display could be adjusted.

[Please refer to the Display Level Adjustment section for a detailed
description of basic operation if need.]



No. 4 [SINGLE]
Push the No. 4 key to input the value of 4.
In order to input the value of numeral 4 in the Start/Stop/Scan/Center
frequencies, push the No. 4 Key.

Single Power Meter Adjustment Function by pushing Shift
Key
After pushing the Shift key on, if No. 4 key is pushed,
Single Power Meter function will be selected.

[Please refer to the section for Single Power Meter using the Power
Meter for detailed description of basic operation if needed.]

77
No. 5 [MULTI]
Push the No. 5 key to input the value of 5.
Push the No. 5 Key to input the value of numeral 5 in the Start/
Stop /Scan/ Center frequencies.

Multi Power Meter Adjustment Function after pushing Shift
Key
On pushing the Shift key and then pushing the No. 5 key is
pushed, Multi Power Meter function can be selected

[Please refer to the Multi Power Meter section for a details description
for using the Power Meter if needed.]


No. 6 [UNIT]
Push the No. 6 key to input the value of 6.
The No. 6 Key is used to input the value of numeral 6 in the
Start/Stop/Scan/Center frequencies.

Level Unit Adjustment Function after pushing Shift Key
By pushing the Shift key and then pushing No.6 key, Level
Unit function can be selected.

[Please refer to the Level Unit section for a detailed description of basic
operation if needed.]


78
3201N/3290N USERS MANUAL
No. 7 [LCD Light]
Push the No. 7 key to input the value of 7.
When inputting the value of numeral 7 in the Start/Stop/Scan/Center
frequencies, the No. 7 Key is used

LCD Light Function after pushing the Shift Key
By pushing the Shift key and then pushing the No. 7 Key,
LCD Light function can be selected.

[Please refer to the LCD Light section for details about basic operation
if needed.]



No. 8 [LCD CONT; LCD Contrast]
Push the No. 8 key to input the value of 8.
To input the value of numeral 8 in the Start/Stop/Scan/Center
frequencies, the No. 8 Key is used.

LCD Contrast Function after pushing the Shift Key
By pushing the Shift key and then pushing the No. 8 Key,
LCD Contrast function can be selected.

[Please refer to the LCD Contrast section for details on basic
operation.]


79
No. 9 [Attenuator]
Push the No. 9 key to input the value of 9.
To input the value of numeral 9 in the Start/Stop/Scan/Center
frequencies, the No. 9 Key is used

Attenuator Setup Function after pushing the Shift Key
By pushing the Shift key and then pushing the No. 9 Key,
Attenuator function can be selected.

[Please refer to the Attenuator Setup section for details about basic
operation.]



No. 0 [System]
Push the No. 0 key to input the value of 0.
When inputting the value of numeral 0 in the Start/Stop/Scan/Center
frequencies, the No. 0 Key is used.

System Setup Function after pushing the Shift Key
By pushing the Shift key and then pushing the No. 0 Key,
System Setup function can be selected.

[Please refer to the System Setup section for details about basic
operation.]




80
3201N/3290N USERS MANUAL
Shift
Using the Function Key
The Shift Key dose not performs any function by itself.
The Shift Key can be used with functions printed below the numeral
keys.
If the shift key is pressed twice, CENT/SPAN located on bottom of
display is changed to START/STOP.



Dot [Buzzer]
The Dot key should be used to input a decimal point
When input the value of Decimal Point in the Start/Stop/Scan/Center
frequencies, this key is used.

Buzzer Setup Function after pushing the Shift Key
By pushing the Shift key and then pushing the Dot Key,
Buzzer On or OFF can be selected.

[Please refer to the Buzzer section for details on basic operation.]

Return Function on Menu and System
Return Function is used to return from lower Menu to higher Menu on
Menu and System.


Test Equipment Depot - 800. 517. 8431 - 99 Washingt on St reet Melrose, MA 02176
FAX 781. 665. 0780 - Test Equipment Depot . com

81
Menu [Load]
Menu Function
Various functions can be selected after entering Menu item.
At the Menu item, pushing the Menu Key once more; will active
the System item.

[Refer the section of Menu and System of basic operation if need more
detail]

Load Function after pushing the Shift Key.
By pushing the Shift key and then pushing the Menu Key,
stored Data can be loaded.

[Please refer to the Store Mode section for details of basic operation.]


Enter [Save]
Enter Function
The Enter Key is used to select Menu or System items.
Save/Load Function after pushing Shift Key
By pushing the Shift key and then pushing the Menu Key,
Data can be saved.

[Please refer to the Save/Load section for details about basic
operation.]


8?
3201N/3290N USERS MANUAL
Up/Down Keys and Knob Key
Up/Down Keys and Knob Key Functions
Movement of Marker, Menu items and System
After setting the Span, the Span can be changed using the Up/Down key.
After setting the Reference level, the Reference level can be changed
using Up/Down key.

Visit us at www. Test Equipment Depot . com
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
TV & FM LEVEL METER
PROLINK-1B
1 GENERAL
1.1 Description
The PROLINK-1B is a professional, true portable, TV and FM Level Meter which
allows the measure of analogue and digital signals with a high degree of accuracy and
it is provided with advanced functions such as Video/Audio ratio measure, tunable audio
carrier, remote control and automatic start-up configuration. On the other hand, its
simple but powerful control procedure makes of it a really easy to use instrument.
It incorporates three different modes for the measure of analog signals: video, audio
and video to audio carrier rate. The measure is shown in a LCD alphanumeric display
and its presentation can be selected between numeric or analog, in the last case it is
shown by a bar graph.
The PROLINK-1B is equipped with a 30 dB RF attenuator, which enables the user
to measure signals of up to 120 dBV with no need for additional external attenuators.
The frequency indication is carried out by a digital frequency meter and shown in an
alphanumeric display. The meter tuning bandwidth is from 47.25 up to 870 MHz. The
tuning can be continuous (frequency mode) with selectable 62.5 kHz or 1 MHz steps,
or by channel.
It is possible to select three different audio demodulators: FM, AM and Level Sound.
In the last mode the acoustical indicator emits a tone whose frequency varies with the
received power, this allows the user to find the peak signal without the need for
continuous observation on the display. Also it is possible to select two detection modes:
peak and average detection which allows the correct measure of digital or AM
modulated sound carriers.
It is also equipped with an RS-232C serial connector which permits the connection
to a personal computer for remote control and calibration purposes or the connection
to a serial printer for data dumping.
The device is powered by a rechargeable battery, which provides an autonomy for
about 3 hours (at 30% On/Off). To recharge the battery the meter is equipped with a
built-in charger that may be connected using an external AC/DC power adapter or a car
lighter plug. A LED in the front panel shows the battery charger operation .
September 1999 Page 1
Test Equipment Depot
99 Washington Street
Melrose, MA 02176-6024
www.testequipmentdepot.com
800-517-8431
781-665-0780 FAX
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
1.2 Specifications
TUNING Digital frequency synthesis
Frequency mode Selectable 62.5 kHz or 1 MHz steps
Channel mode Up to 7 channel plans, each one with 126 channels
max. Channel plan configurable on demand
(OPT-101-61).
Frequency range From 48.25 to 870 MHz
Indication Frequency or channel by a 16 digits alphanumeric
display readout.
Resolution 62.5 kHz
Tuning accuracy 32 kHz
Memory One memory to store power-on configuration.
RF INPUT
Impedance 75
Connector BNC
Maximum signal 130 dBV (3.16 V)
Maximum input voltage 60 V AC rms / 50-60 Hz
MEASUREMENT
Sensitivity
Low range (0 dB RF atten.) 30 dBV to 90 dBV
High range (30 dB RF atten.) 60 dBV to 120 dBV
Readout
Numeric Displayed in the alphanumeric display with 0.1 dB
resolution, with over-range and under-range
indication.
Analog Bar Graph Display
Acoustical Indicator A tone whose frequency varies with the signal level
RF Attenuators
10 dB RF Automatic attenuator, for low range measuring
scale.
30 dB RF Manual attenuator, for high range measuring scale.
Direct measurements accuracy 2dB (0 dB attenuator, 20C 5C, 40 to 70% RH)
Attenuator accuracy 1 dB (20 C 5 C, 40 to 70% RH)
SOUND
Demodulation FM, AM and Level Sound
Volume control
Built-in speaker
Page 2 September 1999
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
POWER SUPPLY
Internal 6 V - 1.2 Ah Lead Acid Battery
External
Measure 9 to 15 V DC
Bat. recharge 12 to 15 V DC
Autonomy 3 hours (at 30% on/off)
Recharging time About 10 hours (starting from a total discharge)
using an appropriate external power adapter.
Safety devices Low battery indication under 5.5 V
Consumption 7.2 W
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT CONDITIONS
Max. altitude 2000 m
Temperature range From 5 C to 40 C
Max. relative humidity 80% (up to 31 C)
decreasing lineally up to 50% at 40 C
MECHANICAL FEATURES
Dimensions W. 199.5 x H. 60.5 x D. 131.5 mm (without case)
Weight 1200 g (battery included)
ACCESSORIES INCLUDED
AD-050 BNC/m-ANT/f IEC adapter
AD-051 BNC/m -"F"/f adapter
AL-013 Europe and other countries 230 V / 50-60 Hz mains adapter
CB-039 6V 1.2 Ah lead acid rechargeable battery
0 PG4034 Carrier belt
DC-244 Carrying bag
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
RM-101 Control software
AL-023 USA and Canada 120 V / 50-60 Hz mains adapter
AA-012 Car supply adapter cable
AD-052 BNC/m-ANT/f (NF) Adapter
MC-75/300 75 (BNC) / 300 (TV) Impedance adapter
CV-550 5-50 MHz Sub-band converter
AT-20 20 dB Attenuator
LN-370B 20 dB Amplifier
NG-282 Noise Generator
CI-023 Portable serial printer
0 CA2040 RS-232 cable DB25/f-DB9/f
AMC/1 Reference antenna
September 1999 Page 3
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
OPTIONS
OPT-101-01 Replace mains adapter with U.S. AL-023
OPT-101-16 MMDS voltage supply
OPT-101-61 Programming of channel plan, measuring units, etc.
OPT-101-67 Extension of frequency range to cover the subband (5 to 45 MHz)
Page 4 September 1999
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2 SAFETY RULES
* Use this equipment connected only to devices or systems with their common at
ground potential.
* This equipment can be used in Category I Installations and Pollution Degree 2
Environments.
* When using some of the following accessories use only the specified ones to
ensure safety.
Rechargeable battery
Mains adapter
Car supply adapter cable
* Observe all specified ratings both of supply and measurement.
* Remember that voltages higher than 60 V DC or 30 V AC rms are dangerous.
* Use this instrument under the specified environmental conditions.
* The user is only authorized to carry out the following maintenance operations:
Replace the battery
On the Maintenance paragraph the proper instructions are given.
Any other change on the equipment should be carried out by qualified
personnel.
* Follow the cleaning instructions described in the Maintenance paragraph.
September 1999 Page 5
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
* Symbols related with safety:
DIRECT CURRENT
ALTERNATING CURRENT
DIRECT AND ALTERNATING
GROUND TERMINAL
PROTECTIVE CONDUCTOR
FRAME TERMINAL
EQUIPOTENTIALITY
ON (Supply)
OFF (Supply)
DOUBLE INSULATION PROTECTED
(Class II Protection)
CAUTION
(Risk of electric shock)
CAUTION ( Refer to manual)
FUSE
Page 6 September 1999
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3 INSTALLATION
The PROLINK-1B level meter is designed for use as a portable device powered by
a rechargeable battery. Before taking any measurement, the user should make sure that
the battery is charged.
3.1 Charging the battery
The PROLINK-1B is powered by a lead acid 6 V 1.2 Ah internal battery. If battery
charge is below 5.5 V, LOW BAT. message and current battery voltage will appear on
the LCD display, showing that it is necessary to recharge the battery. Also, a beep will
be heard.
The instrument is equipped with a 230 V / 50-60 Hz mains adapter (AL-013) for
Europe and other countries to power the battery charger. To request different adapters,
see 'Optional Accessories' in the specifications paragraph.
To fully recharge the battery, connect the device to the AC/DC mains adapter
through the [11] DC input (see figure 3). Connect then the adapter to the mains. Under
these circumstances the [6] BAT LED indicator on the front panel will be on. The length
of time it takes to recharge depends on the condition of the battery. If battery is very low
the recharging period will be about 10 hours with the unit turned off.
CAUTION
1) BEFORE USING THE CHARGER, MAKE SURE THAT THE ADAPTER IS
SUITABLE FOR THE MAINS VOLTAGE.
2) THE MAINS ADAPTER IS DESIGNED FOR INDOOR USE.
3) IF THE EQUIPMENT IS IN STORAGE OR IS USED ONLY OCCASIONALLY FOR
A LONG PERIOD OF TIME, IT IS ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY TO CARRY OUT
FULL-CHARGE OPERATIONS PERIODICALLY (EVERY SIX MONTHS, FOR
EXAMPLE) TO COMPENSATE THE SELF-DISCHARGING EFFECT OF THE
BATTERY.
September 1999 Page 7
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Page 8 September 1999
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
4.1 Controls and Elements Description
Front Panel
Figure 1.- Front Panel.
[1] DISPLAY: 16 characters alphanumeric display. Indicates the level, the
tuned frequency or channel, the measurement mode, the sound
demodulation and the sound detection mode.
[2] TUNING: Rotary knob for tuning control.
[3] VOLUME, OFF: On/Off and Volume control.
[4] RF : RF signal input. BNC connector with an input impedance of
75 .
Maximum input voltage level 130 dBV or 60 V AC rms / 50-60 Hz
[5] RF ATT: 30 dB RF manual attenuator selector.
[6] BAT: LED indicator, it lights on when the battery charger is
connected.
September 1999 Page 9
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Keyboard
Figure 2.- Keyboard
[7] LEVEL: By successive pushing this key, the different measuring modes for
analog channels are allowed: Video Level, Audio Level and
Video/Audio Level.
When pushing this key for more than one second the level readout
mode changes between Numeric Level and Bar Graph Level.
Pushed together with the [9] STEP key it selects the digital or
analog channels measuring mode.
Pushed together with the [8] SOUND it selects the print mode.
[8] SOUND: By pushing over it, the different sound functions are selected: FM,
AM and Level Sound.
Also, keeping this key pushed for more than one second, it
changes the sound detection mode between Peak Detector and
Average Detector.
When it is pushed together with the [9] STEP key, the equipment
stores the current configuration as start-up configuration.
In the print mode, when this key is pushed, the unit dumps to the
printer the information relative to the tuned channel.
[9] STEP: In the Channel Tuning Mode when this key is pushed the
instrument switches to Frequency Tuning Mode. Once in this mode
(Frequency Tuning mode) this key enables faster tuning by shifting
the minimum frequency step between 62.5 kHz and 1 MHz.
In the Frequency Tuning Mode it allows to return to Channel Tuning
Mode by keeping this key pushed for more than one second.
In the Channel Tuning mode, it permits to change to the next
channel plan stored in the unit (if available) by keeping it pushed for
more than one second.
In the print mode, when this key is pushed, the unit dumps to the
printer the information relative to the selected channels.
Page 10 September 1999
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Side panel
Figure 3.- Side Panel
[10] RS-232C connector: Enables the remote control of the PROLINK-1B from a
personal computer with an optional software pack and
the data dumping to a printer.
[11] DC input for the mains adapter
September 1999 Page 11
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4.2 Operating Instructions
4.2.1 Quick operation guide
1.- Power on the equipment by turning clockwise the [3] VOLUME/OFF control.
Figure 4.- Start-up
The display will show the PROLINK-1B version and the recorded initial configuration
in the following order:
Measure: Video, Audio or Video/Audio rate
Sound: FM, AM, or Level Sound
Level readout: Numeric or Bar Graph Level
Audio detection: Peak or Average
Tuning method: Frequency or Channel
Factory start-up configuration is marked with bold letters. These operation modes
can be modified and stored in order to replace the start-up configuration as it is
described in the following paragraphs.
When the PROLINK-1B is battery powered and except if battery is near to full
charge, the device automatically disconnects the display back-lighting one minute
after last control has been modified; when pressing any key it will light again
automatically. If battery voltage is low, the display back-lighting is deactivated in
order to increase the operation time in extreme conditions.
2.- Tune the desired frequency by means of the [2] TUNING control. To change to
Channel Tuning Mode see paragraph '4.2.2 Tuning'.
Page 12 September 1999
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3.- The tuned frequency is shown on the right side of the display and the video carrier
level on the left side.
Figure 5 shows, as an example, the information that will appear as a result of tuning
a video carrier at 471.25 MHz with a level of 54.2 dBV.
Figure 5.-
To select the bar graph level readout mode, see paragraph '4.2.3 Readout
presentation mode'. If the level is higher than 90 dBV the 30 dB attenuator must
be selected by means of the [5] RF ATT key as described in paragraph '4.2.5
Setting the attenuators'.
4.- To change the sound demodulation mode to AM or Level Sound proceed as it is
described in paragraph '4.2.6 Audio demodulation and detection mode'. The [3]
VOLUME/OFF control allows to select the volume level.
5.- To select a different measuring mode: sound carrier level or Video/audio rate
proceed as described in paragraph '4.2.4.1 Measure of analog signals'.
6.- For measuring digital channels proceed as described in paragraph 4.2.4.2.
Following paragraphs describe the different operation modes of the PROLINK-1B.
To explain it several figures are used, arrows point to the key/s which must be pushed.
The indication 2 SEC means that the key must be pushed for more than one second.
Below the keyboard it is shown the message that will appear on the display when
selecting the new operation mode.
September 1999 Page 13
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4.2.2 Tuning
The PROLINK-1B has two tuning modes:
1) Frequency Tuning, with selectable frequency step: 62.5 kHz or 1 MHz.
2) Channel Tuning.
In the Channel Tuning Mode by pushing the [9] STEP the unit switches to the
Frequency Tuning Mode as showed in figure 6.
Figure 6.- Frequency tuning mode
With the [2] TUNING rotary knob it is possible to tune the desired frequency.
In the Frequency Tuning Mode the [9] STEP key enables faster tuning by shifting
the minimum step between 62.5 kHz and 1 MHz in order to carry out substantial
changes in frequency. When the 1 MHz step is selected in the display appears the
symbol ^ at the left side of the tuned frequency as shown in figure 7.
Figure 7.- Frequency tuning, 1 MHz step indication.
Page 14 September 1999
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
In the Frequency Tuning Mode it is possible to change to Channel Tuning Mode
keeping pushed the [9] STEP key for more than one second.
Figure 8.- Channel Tuning Mode.
In the Channel Tuning mode it is possible to change to the next channel plan stored
in the unit by keeping pushed for more than one second the STEP [9] key. Active
channel plan is kept when switching between the channel and frequency tuning modes.
If present channnel plan and tuned channel are desired to be defined as power-on
tuning, present configuration must be stored in the power-on memory (to do this press
SOUND [8] and STEP [9] keys together).
4.2.3 Readout presentation mode
It is possible to select the level readout mode between Numeric Level or Bar Graph
Level by pushing the [7] LEVEL key for more than one second as show next figures.
LEVEL FREQ. MHz
CHANNEL
LEVEL FREQ. MHz
CHANNEL
Figure 9.- Setting Numeric Level readout mode.
September 1999 Page 15
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
LEVEL FREQ. MHz
CHANNEL
LEVEL FREQ. MHz
CHANNEL
Figure 10.- Setting the Bar Graph Level readout mode.
In the Bar Graph Level readout mode, the reference value (the left side of the
display) is 20 dBV, and each display character corresponds to 10 dB.
4.2.4 Analog and digital channels measure
The PROLINK-1B enables the measure of analog and digital channels. To select
the measuring mode it is necessary to push the [7] LEVEL and [9] STEP keys together
as it is shown in figures 11 and 12.
Figure 11.- Analog signals measure.
Figure 12.- Digital signals measure.
Page 16 September 1999
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4.2.4.1 Analog signals measure
In the measure of analog signals three different measuring modes can be selected:
Video, Audio and Video/Audio rate, to do this push the [7] LEVEL key. The measuring
mode selection is sequential as described in the following figure:
Figure 13.- Measuring modes.
Next it is explained the selection of the different measuring modes.
1) Video Carrier Measure, selects the level measure of the currently tuned
video carrier frequency.
Figure 14.- Video Carrier Measure Display.
2) Audio Carrier Measure, selects the level measure of the audio carrier
related to the tuned video carrier .
Figure 15.- Audio Carrier Measure Display.
September 1999 Page 17
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3) Video/Audio Measure, selects the VIDEO/AUDIO rate measure.
Figure 16.- Video/Audio Rate Measure Display.
The Video to Audio rate is a signal quality test that relate to the picture being
delivered to the customer. The following specifications ensure that there is no
interference in the same or in the adjacent channel. Its physical meaning is shown in
next figure.
Figure 17.- Video to Audio rate.
Figure 18.- Measurement of the relative video to audio rate.
Although this process depends on the standard used, it is usual to consider that a
properly transmitted PAL channel should have a sound subcarrier 13 dB below the
video carrier.
Page 18 September 1999
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
In this mode, the audio carrier position can be modified with the TUNING [2] knob
from 0 to 10 MHz, in order to adapt the measure to any TV standard. This has two
important applications as described in the following paragraphs:
4.2.4.1.1 Measurement of the adjacent channel level
The user can obtain the rate of the video carrier amplitudes of two consecutive
channels as shown in the figure:
C
VL1
- C
VL2
(dB)
Figure 19. Measurement of the adjacent channel level
Differences of more than 3 dB between carriers of adjacent channels may cause
problems of interference in reception.
4.2.4.1.2 Qualitative C/N evaluation
The measurement of the carrier-to-noise ratio is a very important parameter to
define the quality of the received signal. With the PROLINK-1B it is possible to obtain
a qualitative evaluation of this parameter. To do this just select the average value sound
detection system and make a video/audio measurement, tuning the audio subcarrier at
a frequency where the readout will be maximum (this will correspond to the minimum
modulation content). If there is not an adjacent channel, the measurement will be done
out-of-channel; on the contrary, if there is an adjacent channel the most suitable point
is around 3.5 MHz from the video carrier. This measurement can be taken as a
reference value and by modifying the situation it is possible to deduce if the noise
increases or not.
September 1999 Page 19
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4.2.4.2 Measure of digital channels power
The PROLINK-1B allows to measure the power associated to a 8 MHz digital
channel directly. To do this follow next procedure:
Select the Digital Channels Measuring Mode:
Figure 20.- Measuring Digital Channels Power
Then check that the bandwidth associated to the digital Channel is 8 MHz (in this
margin the signal level is maintained high). The instrument readout inside this margin
will correspond to the digital channel power (in dBV).
Example
Imagine a digital channel with a central frequency of 400 MHz as it is shown in figure
21. Its frequency bandwidth is of 8 MHz (from 396 MHz to 404 MHz signal level is
maintained high).
Page 20 September 1999
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Figure 21.- Digital channel.
The readout provided by the unit is directly the power of the digital channel:
77.2 dBV.
Figure 22.- Digital channel.
4.2.4.2.1 Considerations about the measure of digital channels
When measuring channels with a bandwidth different to 8 MHz it will be necessary
to apply a numeric correction on the readout provided by the unit.
The numeric correction is the following:
POWER [dBV] = READOUT [dBV] + CF
Where:
POWER: Digital channel power in dBV
READOUT: Readout provided by the PROLINK-1B in dBV
CF: Correction Factor according to the following table :
September 1999 Page 21
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Channel Bandwidth CF
6 MHz - 1.2 dB
7 MHz - 0.6 dB
9 MHz + 0.5 dB
Previous correction must be done because the PROLINK-1B measurement
bandwidth is 230 kHz and the unit is programmed to perform the corrections necessary
for 8 MHz channels (most habitual situation). Previous formula can be deduced using
the next figure:
Figure 23.- PROLINK-1B measurement.
Page 22 September 1999
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
First of all figure 23 shows the Digital Channel Power Spectral Density. The figure
just below displays the PROLINK-1B equivalent input filter. Finally the figure at the
bottom shows how measurement is made by the PROLINK-1B. The unit is programmed
at factory to show on the display the equivalent power for a 8 MHz channel bandwidth.
If channel spectral density is constant within the bandwidth, the ratio between the
measurement and the actual power will be:
POWER [W] = MEASUREMENT [W] X BW
1
/ BW
2
where:
BW
1
: DIGITAL CHANNEL BANDWIDTH
BW
2
: 230 kHz, PROLINK-1B MEASUREMENT BANDWIDTH
and in logarithmic units it corresponds to:
POWER [dBV] = MEASUREMENT [dBV] + 10 log [BW
1
/BW
2
]
4.2.5 Setting the attenuators
When the [5] RF ATT key is resting the equipment detects automatically the
attenuator state and includes its active value in the displayed level.
In the measure of signals with a level higher than 90 dBV it is necessary to select
the 30 dB manual attenuator to prevent the measuring circuits saturation. To do this, it
is necessary to push the [5] RF ATT key. Also in this mode the equipment automatically
detects the attenuator state and includes its active value in the displayed level.
4.2.6 Audio demodulation and detection mode
The [8] SOUND key permits to select the different sound demodulators of the
equipment (FM, AM and Level Sound) and the detection mode (Peak or Average).
To select the sound demodulator push the [8] SOUND key until the desired mode
will be showed in the display, the selection mode is cyclical as shown in the following
figure, so at most it will be necessary to push it twice.
September 1999 Page 23
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Figure 24.- Audio demodulator selection.
Next, the different sound demodulation circuits that can be selected are explained
by showing the message which will appear in each case. In all of them it is possible to
select the volume with the [3] VOLUME/OFF control.
1) Sound FM: Selects the FM sound demodulator for the tuned frequency,
giving its output to the internal speaker.
Figure 25.- FM Sound Demodulator.
2) Sound AM: Selects the AM demodulator output.
Figure 26.- AM Sound Demodulator.
Page 24 September 1999
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3) Level Sound: A single tone of frequency related to the current measured
input level is passed to the speaker.
Figure 27.- Level Sound Demodulator.
This feature facilitates the peak signal search by eliminating the need of continuous
observation of the instrument.
Also, keeping the [8] SOUND key pushed for more than two seconds, the instrument
switches between Peak Detector and Average Detector. The Average Detector is the
suitable detector to measure correctly digital sound and AM (standard L) modulations,
while the Peak Detector is the appropriate one for the measurements of FM
modulations. Next figures show the text that appears when selecting these options.
At all times, the display shows information concerning the detection system used
for measurement in accordance with the following:
a) Peak detector: normal decimal point.
b) Average value detector: hollow decimal point.
Figure 28.- Peak Detector Measure.
September 1999 Page 25
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Figure 29.- Average Detector Measure.
4.2.7 Start-up configuration
To store the current configuration as a start-up configuration push the [8] SOUND
key together with the [9] STEP key.
Figure 30.- Storing the current Configuration.
4.2.8 Print mode
Connecting the PROLINK-1B to a serial printer it is possible to print the information
concerning to the tuned channel or to several channels previously selected. Proceed as
follows:
Page 26 September 1999
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
1.- Connect the unit to a serial printer through the RS-232C connector placed at the
side panel. PROMAX can supply the CI-23 portable serial printer.
In a case where the user opts for the connection to another serial printer, the
handshake used by the PROLINK-1B must be present. See point
4.2.8.1 Handshake and control lines.
2.- Power on the PROLINK-1B by turning clockwise the [3] VOLUME/OFF control. Turn
on the printer.
3.- Tune the desired frequency by means of the [2] TUNING rotary knob.
4.- Select the print mode. To do this push the [7] LEVEL (SELECT) and [8] SOUND
(PRINT) keys together as shown in figure 31. The upper row of the display
(SELECT, PRINT and LIST) refers to the available operations in this mode.
Figure 31.- Print mode selection.
In the display will appear the message PRINT MODE ON in order to confirm the
new operation mode.
5.- To print the information relative to the tuned channel, push the [8] SOUND (PRINT)
key, as shown in figure 32.
Figure 32.- Printing the tuned channel.
September 1999 Page 27
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
In measurement printing, fields appear to be filled in by the user in order to identify
the measurements. These fields are as follows:
LOCATION:
TEST P:
DATE:
TIME:
SIGNATURE:
If the unit is in the numeric level presentation mode, it will print the channel number,
the video carrier level (in dBV) and the ratio Video/Audio.
On the other hand, if the unit is in bar graph presentation mode it will print a
representation on the power spectrum as shown in figure 33.
Figure 33.- Channel printing in bar graph presentation mode: spectrum function
The total sprectum bandwidth printed is of 10 MHz. The initial frequency printed is
2 MHz before the nominal frequency for analogue channels and 5 MHz for digital
channels. Divisions are of 1 MHz in frequency and 10 dB/div in level. The reference
level is 20 dBV.
Page 28 September 1999
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6.- Also it is possible to print the information concerning to several channels
automatically.
Previously it is necessary to select the channels we want to print. Tune the channel
using the rotary control [2] TUNING and next push the [7] LEVEL (SELECT) key.
When tuning a channel previously selected, letter p will appear on the right side of
the display as shown in figure 34.
Figure 34.- Selecting a channel and display indication.
To print the information concerning to the selected channels, push the [9] STEP
(LIST) key.
Figure 35.- Printing the selected channels.
If the unit is in numeric level presentation mode it will print, for each selected
channel, its number, video carrier level (in dBV) and Video to Audio rate.
September 1999 Page 29
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Figure 36.- Printing selected channels in numeric presentation mode.
On the other hand, if the unit is in bar graph presentation mode, it will print two bars
for each channel, one relative to the video carrier level and the other relative to the
audio carrier level as shown in figure 37.
Figure 37.- Printing selected channels in bar graph presentation mode.
7.- To exit the print mode repeat step 4. In the display will appear the message PRINT
MODE OFF.
Page 30 September 1999
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4.2.8.1 Handshake and control lines
Next is described the handshake and control lines used by the PROLINK-1B:
- The following parameters are used for printing through the serial port:
Data bits: 8 bits
Parity: None
Baud-Rate: 19,200 bauds
Stop bits: 1
To modify the printer parameters see 4.2.8.2 CI-23 set-up.
- The control lines used are:
- DATA TRANSMIT (PROLINK-1B pin 3):
To send data to the printer.
- CLEAR TO SEND (PROLINK-1B pin 8) :
Data transfer control. Data are sent only when this line is active.
- DATA TERMINAL READY (PROLINK-1B pin 4)
This line is permanently active in order to indicate the establishment of
the communication.
Connections
The cable between the PROLINK-1B and the printer must have the following
connections:
September 1999 Page 31
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Figure 38.- PROLINK-1B RS-232C connector. Pins numbering.
Page 32 September 1999
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4.2.8.2 CI-23 Set-up
This point explains how to modify the CI-23 printer set-up. Figure 39 shows the
printer keyboard:
Figure 39.- CI-23 keyboard.
[1] POWER LED
[2] SET-UP
[3] FEED
[4] ON
[5] OFF
To initiate the set-up mode push the [2] SET-UP and the [4] ON keys. The
[1] POWER ON LED will flash until set-up mode is turned off. The current parameter
status will be printed. The status of the DATA BITS parameter will be printed in order
to modify it if necessary.
To select the status of the resting parameters (PARITY, BAUD-RATE, COUNTRY,
PRINT MODE, AUTO-OFF, EMULATION and DTR) push the [3] FEED key. The
parameters are selected in a sequential way. To modify the status of any parameter
push sequentially the [2] SET-UP key. Example:
SERIAL BAUD RATE: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 300...
When all the necessary changes have been made, push the [2] SET-UP and [3]
FEED keys to update the configuration of the printer.
If no key is pressed for 15 seconds the set-up mode will be terminated without
changing the original parameters.
September 1999 Page 33
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Page 34 September 1999
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5 REMOTE CONTROL VIA A PC
5.1 Introduction
The design of PROLINK-1B, based on a microprocessor, allows data to be
exchanged between the equipment and a remote controller (personal computer) via an
RS-232C connector. It is thus possible to obtain data as well as remote control of the
PROLINK-1B (tuning, measurement, detection mode, etc) for maintenance purposes
and monitoring of installations.
5.2 Protocol for communication
This protocol is controlled by software and uses a RS-232C connector. Data and
information are exchanged using messages consisting of ASCII alphanumerical
characters. This method ensures easy carrying between different types of personal
computers.
To ensure error-free communication between the two devices, the communication
parameters of the series port must be selected on the Remote Controller (personal
computer) as described in section '4.2.8.1 Handshake and control lines'.
PROLINK-1B accepts remote commands at any time at which the instrument is on,
except when in print mode. That is, it is not necessary to put the instrument in a special
remote control mode; rather, this mode is selected immediately when it detects a
complete command during the time necessary for its execution.
In normal circumstance, PROLINK-1B transmits a XON code (code 11h) every
second. The aim is to indicate to any possible remote device that the equipment is
ready to receive data. The moment it receives a '
*
' character indicating the start of a
remote command, the XON transmission stops and the echo of all the characters
received is returned until it receives a CR (carriage return, code 0Dh). At that moment,
PROLINK-1B understands that it has received a complete remote command, identifies
it and executes it. To indicate to the control equipment that it is in busy status, it sends
a XOFF (code 13h).
If the command received is identified as valid, an ACK (acknowledge, code 06h) is
transmitted and if not valid, a NAK (not acknowledged, code 15h) followed by a CR
(carriage return, code 0Dh) and an LF (line feed, code 0Ah).
If the command has been recognised as valid, it is executed and the required
response is returned (if the command so requires) followed by a new CR+LF.
September 1999 Page 35
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
A typical communication chronogram would be as follows:
PROLINK-1B PC (Controller)
XON ------>
(at 1 second intervals)

XON ------>
<------ '*L0 + CR'
'
*
L0' ------> (character echo until CR)
XOFF ------>
CR + LF ------>
ACK (validation)

(execution)

(optional response)

XON ------>
From the programmer's point of view, the control sequence passes through the
following status:
1) Wait to receive a XON
2) Send a complete command string, at the same time receiving the echo or
confirmation of each characters.
3) Send a CR.
4) Receive a XOFF as confirmation that a complete command has been received
and is being processed.
5a) Receive ACK as confirmation that a remote command has been recognised.
5b) Receive a NAK if the command has not been received (skip to status 8)
6) Receive CR+LF to allow the separation of the response line in terminal mode.
7) If the command is interrogative, the response is a string followed by CR+LF.
8) Once the command is completed, XON is sent. This is then repeated at 1
second intervals.
The special '
*
' character always starts the receipt of a command. PROLINK-1B
interprets the character CR as the end of the command. Any character received
between these two codes is returned as an echo. The information received between
these two codes is interpreted as the command received.
Page 36 September 1999
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
In print mode, as the same port is used as for the data dump to the printer, all data
received is rejected and no XON character is transmitted until leaving this mode.
In the event an erroneous command is received, it is answered with a NAK code
instead of ACK and no execution or response phase is produced; instead it goes into
XON phase to wait for new data.
Commands should always be sent in capital letter and cannot be edited on-line, i.e.,
once a character is received it is stored in the PROLINK-1B buffer and cannot be
rectified by sending an erase code.
Commands in remote control are divided into two groups, orders and interrogations.
Order modify a variable or the equipment status. Interrogations respond with information
concerning equipment status or the value of a variable.
For interrogative command, it is necessary to add the character '?' after the '
*
'
character.
5.3 Remote orders
NOTE 1: The (') character should not be sent; it is only included in the description in
order to define the string that makes up the remote command.
NOTE 2: The values given in small letter are parameters that change in value
depending on the function to be executed. These values are always decimal
or hexadecimal ASCII characters. For example, to transmit the value "1", we
must send the hexadecimal code 31 the corresponds to this character.
Consult the text for acceptable value margins. The transmission of
erroneous parameters or contradictory information may cause PROLINK-1B
to stop operating correctly. In this case it is necessary to reset the
equipment by momentarily switching it off.
'*Bm': Blocks the automatic control of the 10 dB attenuator. The 'm' parameter
must be 0 for automatic operation (usual value) and 1 to set the
attenuator position in the current status.
'*CF' Tunes the nearest channel to the tuned frequency
'*Cnnnn' Selects one channel of the active channel table. 'nnnn' is the
hexadecimal representation of the channel number (from 0 to 125 in
decimal notation).
'*FC' Changes from channel tuning mode to frequency tuning mode, tuning
the frequency of the last tuned channel.
September 1999 Page 37
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
'*Fxxxx': Modifies the tuning frequency reprogramming a new value for the PLL.
The value of the PLL 'xxxx' must be sent in hexadecimal format,
according to the next expression:
xxxx = hexa value of [16(f
in
+ 33,375)]
f
in
= input frequency in MHz
For example, calculating the divider for an input frequency of 655.25
MHz, would be:
f
in
+ 33,375 = 688,625
16 (f
in
+ 33,375) = 11018
xxxx = hexadecimal value of (11018) = 2B0A
command = '*F2B0A'
Four figures, including non-significant zeros must always be sent in the
PLL value.
'*Jsnn' Increases or decreases the tuned channel or frequency (it is equivalent
to turn the TUNING [2] rotary knob). Parameters follow the next rules:
's' + Increment
- Decrease
'nn' 01 < nn < 05 Moves one step
nn 5 Moves 10 steps in channel mode,
one step in frequency mode.
'*Lm': Modifies the active measurement mode. The 'm' parameter corresponds
to the election value for the 'LEVEL' function of the keyboard, in
accordance with the following:
0: measurement LEVEL VIDEO
1: measurement LEVEL AUDIO
2: measurement LEVEL VIDEO/AUDIO
'*Mn' : Selects the measurement mode between analogue or digital. The valid
values for the 'n' parameter are: 0: Analogue channels
1: Digital channels
'*Pm': Selects the detector used in the audio level measurement. Valid values
for the 'm' parameter are: 0: Selects the peak detector
1: Selects the average detector
'*Qm': Selects the active channel plan between one of channel plans stored
in the unit (7 maximum). Valid values for the 'm' (channel plan)
parameter are: 0, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7.
Page 38 September 1999
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
'*R': Recuperates the power-up configuration established by 'SAVE'. Has no
parameters.
'*S': Establishes the current configuration as the power-up configuration. Has
no parameters.
'*Txxxx': Shifts the sound carrier with respect to the video carrier. This shift is
that applied in the LEVEL AUDIO and LEVEL VID/AU measurements.
The 'xxxx' value corresponded to the positive increment over the
current PLL divider which must shift the tuning to include the sound
carrier.
For example, for a sound carrier shifted 5.50 MHz with respect to the
video carrier (G standard), the value is calculated by dividing this
frequency by the minimum synthesis step (62.5 kHz):
5.50 MHz / 62.5 kHz = 88
xxxx = hexadecimal value of [88] = 0058
It is always necessary to send four figures included the non-significative
zeros.
'*Um': Establishes the active sound mode associated with the 'SOUND'
function. Valid values of the 'm' parameter are:
0: selection of SOUND FM
1: selection of SOUND AM
2: selection of SOUND LEVEL
'*Xm': Allows switching of the 10 dB attenuator status in accordance with the
value of the 'm' parameter. The 0 value turns the attenuator OFF (0 dB)
while the 1 value turns it ON (10 dB).
September 1999 Page 39
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Command Action
B0 Automatic operation of 10 dB attenuator
B1 Blocks position of 10 dB attenuator
CF Tunes the nearest channel to the tuned frequency
Cnnnn Selection of one channel of the active channel table
FC Changes from channel tunning mode to frequency mode
Fxxxx Modifies the tuning frequency
Jsnn Increases / decreases the channel / the frequency
L0 Moves to VIDEO measurement
L1 Moves to AUDIO measurement
L2 Moves to VIDEO/AUDIO measurement
M0 Analogue measuring mode selection
M1 Digital measuring mode selection
P0 Selects the peak detection system for the sound measurement
P1 Selects the average detection system for the sound measurement
Qm Selects the channel plan (m: 0, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7)
R Recalls power-up configuration
S Establishes power-up configuration
Txxxx Shifts sound carrier
U0 Selects FM sound demodulator
U1 Selects AM sound demodulator
U2 Selects sound LEVEL demodulator
X0 Disables 10 dB attenuator
X1 Enables 10 dB attenuator
Table II.- Remote commands
Page 40 September 1999
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5.4 Remote interrogations
'*?&xx': Returns the value contained in certain internal variables of
PROLINK-1B. These variables are addressed with a byte and return a
byte. The address value and the returned value are always
hexadecimal. Not all equipment variables make sense for the
programmer. The main purpose is for reading the buffer that appears
on the display. This buffer contains the corrected level reading and the
frequency or channel tuned to. As this information is expressed in
ASCII characters, it is easily interpreted by an external programmer.
Some useful addresses are (hexadecimal values):
18: high byte of PLL divider
19: low byte of PLL value
20 to 2F: 16 characters of the LCD display (from left to right)
For example we can determine if there is overflow or underflow by
reading the first characters of the displayed buffer: '*?&20'+CR+ LF'.
The response is: '*yy'
If the 'yy' code is the ASCII character for the '<' or '>' characters (3Ch
and 3Eh, respectively), this indicates that we are outside the
equipments measurement margins.
'*?Am': Returns the level at the A/D converter input or at the display. The 'm'
parameter can have the following values:
1: average detector measurement
6: peak detector measurement
8: display content (corrected level, measuring units and
channel or frequency).
The average detector is used in the measurement of AM modulated
sound carriers (L standard) or digital carriers as is the case with NICAM
sound or QPSK or QAM modulations.
The values read are not corrected not compensated by temperature.
There they can only be used as a qualitative measurement of the input
signal. For example, for channel search.
The code returned corresponds to a voltage between 0 and 4.095V.
Codification is hexadecimal.
September 1999 Page 41
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
For example: '*?A6' + CR
with a response: '*A60237'
The '0237' value corresponds to 567 in decimal, which is the value in
millivolts of the input voltage (0.567 V). The approximate value
corresponding to the input level in dBs can be determined by
multiplying this voltage by a factor of 23 and adding an offset value of
some 15 dB. Thus we have:
approx. dB = 0.567*23 + 15 = 28 dB.
'*?B': The response to this command is to block the 10 dB attenuator
'*B0': indicates the attenuator is in automatic mode.
'*B1': indicates that the attenuator is blocked.
'*?C' Returns the tuned channel in hexadecimal notation
'*?F' Returns the PLL divider value in hexadecimal notation
'*?M' Returns the measurement mode. The answer is '0' for analogue mode
and 1 for digital mode.
'*?P' Returns detection system used in the sound measurement. '0': peak
detector. '1': average detector.
'*?Q' Returns active chanel plan (possible responses are : 0, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and
7).
'*?X': This command returns the status of the 10 dB and 30 dB attenuators.
Possible responses are:
'*X00': 30 dB and 10 dB attenuators disabled (attenuation is 0 dB).
'*X01': 30 dB attenuator disabled and 10 dB attenuator enabled
(attenuation is 10 dB).
'*X30': 30 dB attenuator enabled and 10 dB attenuator disabled
(attenuation is 30 dB).
'*X31': 30 dB and 10 dB attenuators enabled (attenuation is 40 dB).
'*?V': Responds with a string identical to that shown on powering up the
equipment. In this set of characters you can read the model and the
version of the control program. Its mains use is to detect the presence
of PROLINK-1B and determine the software version.
Page 42 September 1999
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Command Action
?&xx Returns the value contained in certain internal variables of PROLINK-1B
?A1 Returns the input level of the A/D converter (average detector)
?A6 Returns the input level of the A/D converter (peak detector)
?A8 Returns the display content
?B Returns the blocked status of the 10 dB attenuator
?C Returns the tuned channel
?F Returns the value of the PLL divider
?M Returns the measurement mode: analogue or digital
?P Returns the detection system used in the sound measurement
?Q Returns the number of the actual channel plan
?V Returns the model and version of the control program
?X Returns the status of the 10 dB and 30 dB attenuators
Table III.- Remote interrogations
September 1999 Page 43
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Page 44 September 1999
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6 MAINTENANCE
6.1 Replacing the battery
The battery must be replaced when the capacity of the fully-charged battery is
appreciably reduced.
To install the battery, follow these steps:
Figure 40.- Installing the battery
1 - Turn off the instrument.
2 - Remove the 4 attachment screws (A) which are positioned in the laterals of the
device.
3 - Remove the instrument top lid.
4 - Remove the two screws (B) which close the battery compartment.
5 - Disconnect the battery terminals and replace it with a new one. (CB-039 reference).
Take care with the polarity (red positive, black negative) of the terminals.
6 - Close the battery compartment and replace the two screws (B). Replace the
instrument top lid and attach it with the corresponding screws (A).
September 1999 Page 45
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
WARNING
Avoid any type of short circuit among the cables connected to the battery, since the
resulting high current may cause serious damage to the instrument.
6.2 Cleaning recommendations
CAUTION
TO CLEAN THE COVER, TAKE CARE THE INSTRUMENT IS DISCONNECTED.
CAUTION
DO NOT USE SCENTED HYDROCARBONS OR CHLORIZED SOLVENTS. SUCH
PRODUCTS MAY ATTACK THE PLASTICS USED IN THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE
COVER.
The cover should be cleaned by means of a light solution of detergent and water
applied with a soft cloth.
Dry thoroughly before using the system again.
Page 46 September 1999
PROLINK-1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2 SAFETY RULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.1 Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.1 Controls and Elements Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.2 Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.2.1 Quick operation guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.2.2 Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
4.2.3 Readout presentation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.2.4 Analog and digital channels measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
4.2.4.1 Analog signals measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
4.2.4.1.1 Measurement of the adjacent channel level . . . . . . . . . 19
4.2.4.1.2 Qualitative C/N evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4.2.4.2 Measure of digital channels power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
4.2.4.2.1 Considerations about the measure of digital channels . . 21
4.2.5 Setting the attenuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.2.6 Audio demodulation and detection mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.2.7 Start-up configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4.2.8 Print mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4.2.8.1 Handshake and control lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
4.2.8.2 CI-23 Set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
5 REMOTE CONTROL VIA A PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
5.2 Protocol for communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
5.3 Remote orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
5.4 Remote interrogations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
6 MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
6.1 Replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
6.2 Cleaning recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Test Equipment Depot
99 Washington Street
Melrose, MA 02176-6024
www.testequipmentdepot.com
800-517-8431
781-665-0780 FAX

1 / 9
EagleShot - New Free PC Software of GSP-830

(Note:EagleShot V3.4.3 )
EagleShot
(1) (2) (3)




FileMode
FileEagleShot
Mode3GHz SA2.7GHz SA2.7GHz SA for EMI

3GHz SA
2.7GHz SA GSP-827 EagleShot


(1)
(2)
(3)

2 / 9

2.7GHz for EMCGSP-827 EagleShot EMI

GSP-827 EagleShot


EagleShot PC


(1) Connect to PC
(1) (2) (3) (4)

3 / 9
(2) Play back from PC(Recording)(*.sp3)

(3) Setting
(.sp3)
Connection PortCOM Port USB
File save asJPGBMPText
SARecording

Limit Line

DefaultEagleShot


(4) ExitEagleShot

EagleShot PC (Connect to PC)GSP-830
EMI Filter Optional (Option 05)

/


4 / 9
GSP-830
Exit Remote Control Mode



GSP-830

(1) Connect to PC
(2) Recording
(*.sp3)
C:\Program Files\EagleShot
(20070426134643.sp3 )

.sp3
(3) CaptureGSP-830

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)

5 / 9

(4) Save to PC
(Setting)JPGBMP Text
(5) Print(JPG / BMP / TXT)
(6) MarkerMarker 5
EMI 10

Marker EMI Mode Marker

Marker All to Peaks
Peak

Peak







Marker

6 / 9
(7) Clear Display


(8) Play back from PCRecording (.sp3)
(9) Setting(.sp3)
Connection PortCOM Port USB
File save asJPGBMPText
SARecording
Limit Line
DefaultEagleShot


7 / 9
EMC Mode

Connection PortCOM Port USB
File Save asJPGBMPText

EMI
z Wide Range Scan/ Single Point Test
or
z MODEConduction / Radiation

z DetectionNormal / Sample /
Peak +
REF LVLReference Level (dBuV)
Threshold
Draw PC StoredText

Display EMI Step PageEMI /

(10) EMI ModeEMI (EMI filter Option )
Log

Normal Mode EMI Mode



8 / 9
(11) ControlEagleShot ()
FrequencyStart/Stop/Center/Span
AmplitudeReference Level / Unit /Scale
RBW/VBWGSP-830 RBW/VBW

(12) ExitProgram

9 / 9

1. USB RS-232 GSP-830
2. EagleShot Setting Function
3. SA Mode EMI Mode
4. Rule 1SA Mode
A. Capture
B. Marker Peak
C. Setting (JPGBMPText)
D. Save to PC Print out
5. Rule 2EMC Mode
A. Capture
B. Setting EMC
C. Setting (Ref. Level)(Threshold)
D. Marker Peak
E. Setting (JPGBMPText)
F. Save to PC Print out